Compounds that modulate intracellular calcium

ABSTRACT

Described herein are compounds and pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds, which modulate the activity of store-operated calcium (SOC) channels. Also described herein are methods of using such SOC channel modulators, alone and in combination with other compounds, for treating diseases or conditions that would benefit from inhibition of SOC channel activity.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application claims benefit of priority to U.S. Appl. No. 61/713,345filed Oct. 12, 2012; and U.S. Appl. No. 61/713,379 filed Oct. 12, 2012,each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

Described herein are compounds, pharmaceutical compositions andmedicaments that include such compounds, and methods of using suchcompounds to modulate store operated calcium (SOC) channel activity.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Calcium plays a vital role in cell function and survival. For example,calcium is a key element in the transduction of signals into and withincells. Cellular responses to growth factors, neurotransmitters, hormonesand a variety of other signal molecules are initiated throughcalcium-dependent processes.

Virtually all cell types depend in some manner upon the generation ofcytoplasmic Ca²⁺ signals to regulate cell function, or to triggerspecific responses. Cytosolic Ca²⁺ signals control a wide array ofcellular functions ranging from short-term responses such as contractionand secretion to longer-term regulation of cell growth andproliferation. Usually, these signals involve some combination ofrelease of Ca²⁺ from intracellular stores, such as the endoplasmicreticulum (ER), and influx of Ca²⁺ across the plasma membrane. In oneexample, cell activation begins with an agonist binding to a surfacemembrane receptor, which is coupled to phospholipase C (PLC) through aG-protein mechanism. PLC activation leads to the production of inositol1,4,5-triphosphate (IP₃), which in turn activates the IP₃ receptorcausing release of Ca²⁺ from the ER. The fall in ER Ca²⁺ then signals toactivate plasma membrane store-operated calcium (SOC) channels.

Store-operated calcium (SOC) influx is a process in cellular physiologythat controls such diverse functions such as, but not limited to,refilling of intracellular Ca²⁺ stores (Putney et al. Cell, 75, 199-201,1993), activation of enzymatic activity (Fagan et al., J. Biol. Chem.275:26530-26537, 2000), gene transcription (Lewis, Annu. Rev. Immunol.19:497-521, 2001), cell proliferation (Nunez et al., J. Physiol. 571.1,57-73, 2006), and release of cytokines (Winslow et al., Curr. Opin.Immunol. 15:299-307, 2003). In some nonexcitable cells, e.g., bloodcells, immune cells, hematopoietic cells, T lymphocytes and mast cells,SOC influx occurs through calcium release-activated calcium (CRAC)channels, a type of SOC channel.

The calcium influx mechanism has been referred to as store-operatedcalcium entry (SOCE). Stromal interaction molecule (STIM) proteins arean essential component of SOC channel function, serving as the sensorsfor detecting the depletion of calcium from intracellular stores and foractivating SOC channels.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

Described herein are compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)(hereinafter “compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)”),compositions that include such compounds, and methods of use thereof,for modulating intracellular calcium. In one aspect, compounds ofFormula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulate intracellular calcium byinhibition of store operated calcium channel activity. In one aspect,compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulateintracellular calcium by preventing the activity of activated storeoperated calcium channel complexes. In one aspect, compounds of Formula(I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) inhibit activation of store operatedchannels. In one aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or(V) inhibit activation of calcium-release activated calcium channels. Inone aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulatean activity of, modulate an interaction of, or modulate the level of, ordistribution of, or bind to, or interact with at least one protein ofthe SOC channel complex. In one aspect, compounds of Formula (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) modulate an activity of, modulate an interaction of,or modulate the level of, or distribution of, or bind to, or interactwith at least one protein of the CRAC channel complex.

In one aspect, the compounds described herein are selective inhibitorsof CRAC channel activity.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (I):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NR₆—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₆ is H, or C₁-C₆alkyl;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (II):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically        acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug        thereof.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (III):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NR₆—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₆ is H, or C₁-C₆alkyl;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (IV):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (V):

wherein:

-   -   R₁ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        substituted with at least one R₄;    -   each R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   each R₄ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₅ is H, CH₃, Et, isopropyl or allyl;        or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically        acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug        thereof

In another aspect is a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compoundof Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) and a pharmaceuticallyacceptable diluent, excipient, carrier or binder thereof.

In another aspect is the use of a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, forthe formulation of a medicament for the modulation of store-operatedcalcium (SOC) channel activity in a subject or for the treatment of adisease, disorder or condition in a subject that would benefit from themodulation of store-operated calcium (SOC) channel activity. In oneembodiment, the compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)inhibits store-operated calcium entry (SOCE). In another embodiment, thestore-operated calcium channel activity is calcium release activatedcalcium channel activity.

In another aspect is a method of modulating store-operated calcium (SOC)channel activity comprising contacting the SOC channel complex, orportion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or(V).

In another aspect is a method of modulating calcium release activatedcalcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprising administering tothe mammal a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) whereinthe compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulates CRACactivity in the mammal.

In another aspect is a method of inhibiting store-operated calcium entry(SOCE) activation of nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT) in amammal comprising administering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) wherein the compound of Formula (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) inhibits SOCE activation of NFAT in the mammal.

In yet another aspect is a method of decreasing cytokine release byinhibiting the SOCE activation of NFAT in a mammal comprisingadministering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV)or (V) wherein the compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)decreases cytokine release in the mammal.

In a further aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V).

In one aspect is a method for treating an autoimmune disease,heteroimmune disease or condition, or inflammatory disease in a mammalcomprising administering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) or pharmaceutically acceptable salt or prodrugthereof.

In one embodiment, the autoimmune disease is inflammatory bowel disease,rheumatoid arthritis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren'ssyndrome, type I diabetes, lupus erythematosus, psoriasis,osteoarthritis, scleroderma, and autoimmune hemolytic anemia.

In another embodiment, the heteroimmune disease or condition isgraft-versus-host disease, graft rejection, atopic dermatitis, allergicconjunctivitis, organ transplant rejection, allogeneic or xenogenictransplantation, and allergic rhinitis.

In a further embodiment, the inflammatory disease is uveitis,vasculitis, vaginitis, asthma, inflammatory muscle disease, dermatitis,interstitial cystitis, colitis, Crohn's disease, dermatomyositis,hepatitis, and chronic relapsing hepatitis.

In another aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder or condition in the mammal isselected from glomerulonephritis, hepatic diseases or disorders, renaldiseases or disorders, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease,osteoporosis, eczema, pulmonary fibrosis, thyroiditis, cystic fibrosis,and primary biliary cirrhosis.

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder or condition is rheumatoidarthritis.

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder or condition is psoriasis.

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder, or condition is inflammatorybowel disease.

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder, or condition is organtransplant rejection.

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder, or condition is multiplesclerosis.

In one aspect is the use of a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV)or (V) in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of adisease, disorder, or condition that would benefit from inhibition ofstore operated calcium channel activity.

Compounds provided herein are used for modulating intracellular calcium.In one aspect, compounds provided herein modulate SOC channel activity.In one aspect, compounds provided herein modulate CRAC channel activity.In another aspect, compounds provided herein modulate STIM proteinactivity. In another aspect, compounds provided herein modulate Oraiprotein activity. In another aspect, compounds provided herein modulatethe functional interactions of STIM proteins with Orai proteins. Inanother aspect, compounds provided herein reduce the number offunctional SOC channels. In another aspect, compounds provided hereinreduce the number of functional CRAC channels. In one aspect, compoundsdescribed herein are SOC channel blockers. In one aspect, compoundsdescribed herein are CRAC channel blockers or CRAC channel modulators.

In one aspect, compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) areselective inhibitors of CRAC channel activity.

Other objects, features and advantages of the compounds, compositions,methods, and uses described herein will become apparent from thefollowing detailed description. It should be understood, however, thatthe detailed description and the specific examples, while indicatingspecific embodiments, are given by way of illustration only, sincevarious changes and modifications within the spirit and scope of thedisclosure will become apparent from this detailed description.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 outlines the I_(CRAC) channel pathway.

FIG. 2 shows the typical I_(CRAC) traces in cells stably overexpressinghuman Orai1 and STIM 1 in response to the voltage stimulus immediatelyafter break-in, before I_(CRAC) is activated, and at 5 min afterI_(CRAC) is fully activated by depletion of intracellular calciumstores.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Cellular calcium homeostasis is a result of the summation of regulatorysystems involved in the control of intracellular calcium levels andmovements. Cellular calcium homeostasis is achieved, at least in part,by calcium binding and by movement of calcium into and out of the cellacross the plasma membrane and within the cell by movement of calciumacross membranes of intracellular organelles including, for example, theendoplasmic reticulum, sarcoplasmic reticulum, mitochondria andendocytic organelles including endosomes and lysosomes.

Movement of calcium across cellular membranes is carried out byspecialized proteins. For example, calcium from the extracellular spacecan enter the cell through various calcium channels and a sodium/calciumexchanger and is actively extruded from the cell by calcium pumps andsodium/calcium exchangers. Calcium can also be released from internalstores through inositol trisphosphate or ryanodine receptors and can betaken up by these organelles by means of calcium pumps.

Calcium can enter cells by any of several general classes of channels,including but not limited to, voltage-operated calcium (VOC) channels,store-operated calcium (SOC) channels, and sodium/calcium exchangersoperating in reverse mode. VOC channels are activated by membranedepolarization and are found in excitable cells like nerve and muscleand are for the most part not found in nonexcitable cells. Under someconditions, Ca²⁺ can enter cells via Na⁺—Ca²⁺ exchangers operating inreverse mode.

Endocytosis provides another process by which cells can take up calciumfrom the extracellular medium through endosomes. In addition, somecells, e.g., exocrine cells, can release calcium via exocytosis.

Cytosolic calcium concentration is tightly regulated with resting levelsusually estimated at approximately 0.1 μM in mammalian cells, whereasthe extracellular calcium concentration is typically about 2 mM. Thistight regulation facilitates transduction of signals into and withincells through transient calcium flux across the plasma membrane andmembranes of intracellular organelles. There is a multiplicity ofintracellular calcium transport and buffer systems in cells that serveto shape intracellular calcium signals and maintain the low restingcytoplasmic calcium concentration. In cells at rest, the principalcomponents involved in maintaining basal calcium levels are calciumpumps and leak pathways in both the endoplasmic reticulum and plasmamembrane. Disturbance of resting cytosolic calcium levels can affecttransmission of calcium-dependent signals and give rise to defects in anumber of cellular processes. For example, cell proliferation involves aprolonged calcium signaling sequence. Other cellular processes thatinvolve calcium signaling include, but are not limited to, secretion,transcription factor signaling, and fertilization.

Cell-surface receptors that activate phospholipase C (PLC) createcytosolic Ca²⁺ signals from intra- and extra-cellular sources. Aninitial transient rise of [Ca²⁺ ]_(i) (intracellular calciumconcentration) results from the release of Ca²⁺ from the endoplasmicreticulum (ER), which is triggered by the PLC product,inositol-1,4,5-trisphosphate (IP₃), opening IP₃ receptors in the ER(Streb et al. Nature, 306, 67-69, 1983). A subsequent phase of sustainedCa²⁺ entry across the plasma membrane then ensues, through specializedstore operated calcium (SOC) channels (in the case of immune cells theSOC channels are calcium release-activated calcium (CRAC) channels) inthe plasma membrane. Store-operated Ca²⁺ entry (SOCE) is the process inwhich the emptying of Ca²⁺ stores itself activates Ca²⁺ channels in theplasma membrane to help refill the stores (Putney, Cell Calcium, 7,1-12, 1986; Parekh et al., Physiol. Rev. 757-810; 2005). SOCE does morethan simply provide Ca²⁺ for refilling stores, but can itself generatesustained Ca²⁺ signals that control such essential functions as geneexpression, cell metabolism and exocytosis (Parekh and Putney, Physiol.Rev. 85, 757-810 (2005).

In lymphocytes and mast cells, activation of antigen or Fc receptors,respectively causes the release of Ca²⁺ from intracellular stores, whichin turn leads to Ca²⁺ influx through CRAC channels in the plasmamembrane. The subsequent rise in intracellular Ca²⁺ activatescalcineurin, a phosphatase that regulates the transcription factor NFAT.In resting cells, NFAT is phosphorylated and resides in the cytoplasm,but when dephosphorylated by calcineurin, NFAT translocates to thenucleus and activates different genetic programmes depending onstimulation conditions and cell type. In response to infections andduring transplant rejection, NFAT partners with the transcription factorAP-1 (Fos-Jun) in the nucleus of “effector” T cells, therebytransactivating cytokine genes, genes that regulate T cell proliferationand other genes that orchestrate an active immune response (Rao et al.,Annu Rev Immunol., 1997; 15:707-47). In contrast, in T cells recognizingself antigens, NFAT is activated in the absence of AP-1, and activates atranscriptional programme known as “anergy” that suppresses autoimmuneresponses (Macian et al., Transcriptional mechanisms underlyinglymphocyte tolerance. Cell. 2002 Jun. 14; 109(6):719-31). In a subclassof T cells known as regulatory T cells which suppress autoimmunitymediated by self-reactive effector T cells, NFAT partners with thetranscription factor FOXP3 to activate genes responsible for suppressorfunction (Wu et al., Cell, 2006 July 28; 126(2):375-87; Rudensky A Y,Gavin M, Zheng Y. Cell. 2006 July 28; 126(2):253-256).

The endoplasmic reticulum (ER) carries out a variety processes. The ERhas a role as both a Ca²⁺ sink and an agonist-sensitive Ca²⁺ store and,protein folding/processing takes place within its lumen. In the lattercase, numerous Ca²⁺-dependent chaperone proteins ensure that newlysynthesized proteins are folded correctly and sent off to theirappropriate destination. The ER is also involved in vesicle trafficking,release of stress signals, regulation of cholesterol metabolism, andapoptosis. Many of these processes require intraluminal Ca²⁺, andprotein misfolding, ER stress responses, and apoptosis can all beinduced by depleting the ER of Ca²⁺ for prolonged periods of time.Because it contains a finite amount of Ca²⁺, it is clear that ER Ca²⁺content must fall after release of that Ca²⁺ during stimulation.However, to preserve the functional integrity of the ER, it is vitalthat the Ca²⁺ content does not fall too low or is maintained at least ata low level. Replenishment of the ER with Ca²⁺ is therefore a centralprocess to all eukaryotic cells. Because a fall in ER Ca²⁺ contentactivates store-operated Ca²⁺ channels in the plasma membrane, a majorfunction of this Ca²⁺ entry pathway is believed to be maintenance of ERCa²⁺ levels that are necessary for proper protein synthesis and folding.However, store-operated Ca²⁺ channels have other important roles.

The understanding of store operated calcium entry was provided byelectrophysiological studies which established that the process ofemptying the stores activated a Ca²⁺ current in mast cells called Ca²⁺release-activated Ca²⁺ current or I_(CRAC). I_(CRAC) is non-voltageactivated, inwardly rectifying, and remarkably selective for Ca²⁺. It isfound in several cell types mainly of hemopoietic origin. I_(CRAC) isnot the only store-operated current, and it is now apparent thatstore-operated influx encompasses a family of Ca²⁺-permeable channels,with different properties in different cell types. I_(CRAC) was thefirst store-operated Ca²⁺ current to be described and remains a popularmodel for studying store-operated influx.

Store-operated calcium channels can be activated by any procedure thatempties ER Ca²⁺ stores; it does not seem to matter how the stores areemptied, the net effect is activation of store-operated Ca²⁺ entry.Physiologically, store emptying is evoked by an increase in the levelsof IP₃ or other Ca²⁺-releasing signals followed by Ca²⁺ release from thestores. But there are several other methods for emptying stores. Thesemethods include the following:

1) elevation of IP₃ in the cytosol (following receptor stimulation or,dialyzing the cytosol with IP₃ itself or related congeners like thenonmetabolizable analog Ins(2,4,5)P₃);2) application of a Ca²⁺ ionophore (e.g., ionomycin) to permeabilize theER membrane;3) dialyzing the cytoplasm with high concentrations of Ca²⁺ chelators(e.g., EGTA or BAPTA), which chelate Ca²⁺ that leaks from the stores andhence prevent store refilling;4) exposure to the sarcoplasmic/endoplasmic reticulum Ca²⁺-ATPase(SERCA) inhibitors like thapsigargin, cyclopiazonic acid, anddi-tert-butylhydroquinone;5) sensitizing the IP₃ receptors to resting levels of InsP₃ with agentslike thimerosal; and6) loading membrane-permeable metal Ca²⁺ chelators likeN,N,N′,N′-tetrakis(2-pyridylmethyl)ethylene diamine (TPEN) directly intothe stores.

Through mass action, TPEN lowers free intraluminal Ca2+ concentrationwithout changing total store Ca²⁺ such that the storedepletion-dependent signal is generated.

These methods of emptying stores are not devoid of potential problems.The key feature of store-operated Ca²⁺ entry is that it is the fall inCa²⁺ content within the stores and not the subsequent rise incytoplasmic Ca²⁺ concentration that activates the channels. However,ionomycin and SERCA pump blockers generally cause a rise in cytoplasmicCa²⁺ concentration as a consequence of store depletion, and such a risein Ca²⁺ could open Ca²⁺-activated cation channels permeable to Ca²⁺. Oneway to avoid such problems is to use agents under conditions wherecytoplasmic Ca²⁺ has been strongly buffered with high concentrations ofCa²⁺ chelator such as EGTA or BAPTA.

Store-Operated Calcium Entry

Reduced calcium concentration in intracellular calcium stores such asthe endoplasmic reticulum resulting from release of calcium there fromprovides a signal for influx of calcium from the extracellular mediuminto the cell. This influx of calcium, which produces a sustained“plateau” elevation of cytosolic calcium concentration, generally doesnot rely on voltage-gated plasma membrane channels and does not involveactivation of calcium channels by calcium. This calcium influx mechanismis referred to as capacitative calcium entry (CCE), calciumrelease-activated, store-operated or depletion-operated calcium entry.Store-operated calcium entry can be recorded as an ionic current withdistinctive properties. This current is referred to as Isoc(store-operated current) or I_(CRAC) (calcium release-activatedcurrent).

Electrophysiological analysis of store-operated or calciumrelease-activated currents reveal distinct biophysical properties (see,e.g., Parekh and Penner (1997) Physiol. Rev. 77:901-930) of thesecurrents. For example, the current can be activated by depletion ofintracellular calcium stores (e.g., by non-physiological activators suchas thapsigargin, CPA, ionomycin and BAPTA, and physiological activatorssuch as IP₃) and can be selective for divalent cations, such as calcium,over monovalent ions in physiological solutions or conditions, can beinfluenced by changes in cytosolic calcium levels, and can show alteredselectivity and conductivity in the presence of low extracellularconcentrations of divalent cations. The current may also be blocked orenhanced by 2-APB (depending on concentration) and blocked by SKF96365and Gd³⁺ and generally can be described as a calcium current that is notstrictly voltage-gated.

Patch-clamp studies in mast cells and Jurkat leukaemic T cells haveestablished the CRAC entry mechanism as an ion channel with distinctivebiophysical characteristics, including a high selectivity for Ca²⁺paired with an exceedingly low conductance. Furthermore, the CRACchannel was shown to fulfill the rigorous criteria for beingstore-operated, which is the activation solely by the reduction of Ca²⁺in the ER rather than by cytosolic Ca²⁺ or other messengers generated byPLC (Prakriya et al., In Molecular and Cellular Insights into IonChannel Biology (ed. Robert Maue) 121-140 (Elsevier Science, Amsterdam,2004)).

Regulation of Store-Operated Calcium Entry by Intracellular CalciumStores

Store-operated calcium entry is regulated by the level of calcium withinan intracellular calcium store. Intracellular calcium stores can becharacterized by sensitivity to agents, which can be physiological orpharmacological, which activate release of calcium from the stores orinhibit uptake of calcium into the stores. Different cells have beenstudied in characterization of intracellular calcium stores, and storeshave been characterized as sensitive to various agents, including, butnot limited to, IP₃ and compounds that effect the IP₃ receptor,thapsigargin, ionomycin and/or cyclic ADP-ribose (cADPR) (see, e.g.,Berridge (1993) Nature 361:315-325; Churchill and Louis (1999) Am. J.Physiol. 276:C426-C434; Dargie et al. (1990) Cell Regul. 1:279-290;Gerasimenko et al. (1996) Cell 84:473-480; Gromoda et al. (1995) FEBSLett. 360:303-306; Guse et al. (1999) Nature 398:70-73).

Accumulation of calcium within endoplasmic reticulum and sarcoplasmicreticulum (SR; a specialized version of the endoplasmic reticulum instriated muscle) storage organelles is achieved throughsarcoplasmic-endoplasmic reticulum calcium ATPases (SERCAs), commonlyreferred to as calcium pumps. During signaling (i.e., when endoplasmicreticulum channels are activated to provide for calcium release from theendoplasmic reticulum into the cytoplasm), endoplasmic reticulum calciumis replenished by the SERCA pump with cytoplasmic calcium that hasentered the cell from the extracellular medium (Yu and Hinkle (2000) J.Biol. Chem. 275:23648-23653; Hofer et al. (1998) EMBO J. 17:1986-1995).

Calcium release channels associated with IP₃ and ryanodine receptorsprovide for controlled release of calcium from endoplasmic andsarcoplasmic reticulum into the cytoplasm resulting in transientincreases in cytoplasmic calcium concentration. IP₃ receptor-mediatedcalcium release is triggered by IP₃ formed by the break down of plasmamembrane phosphoinositides through the action of phospholipase C, whichis activated by binding of an agonist to a plasma membrane Gprotein-coupled receptor or tyrosine kinase. Ryanodine receptor-mediatedcalcium release is triggered by an increase in cytoplasmic calcium andis referred to as calcium-induced calcium release (CICR). The activityof ryanodine receptors (which have affinity for ryanodine and caffeine)may also be regulated by cyclic ADP-ribose.

Thus, the calcium levels in the stores, and in the cytoplasm, fluctuate.For example, ER free calcium concentration can decrease from a range ofabout 60-400 μM to about 1-50 μM when HeLa cells are treated withhistamine, an agonist of PLC-linked histamine receptors (Miyawaki et al.(1997) Nature 388:882-887). Store-operated calcium entry is activated asthe free calcium concentration of the intracellular stores is reduced.Depletion of store calcium, as well as a concomitant increase incytosolic calcium concentration, can thus regulate store-operatedcalcium entry into cells.

Cytoplasmic Calcium Buffering

Agonist activation of signaling processes in cells can involve dramaticincreases in the calcium permeability of the endoplasmic reticulum, forexample, through opening of IP₃ receptor channels, and the plasmamembrane through store-operated calcium entry. These increases incalcium permeability are associated with an increase in cytosoliccalcium concentration that can be separated into two components: a“spike” of calcium release from the endoplasmic reticulum duringactivation of the IP₃ receptor and a plateau phase which is a sustainedelevation of calcium levels resulting from entry of calcium into thecytoplasm from the extracellular medium. Upon stimulation, the restingintracellular free calcium concentration of about 100 nM can riseglobally to greater than 1 μM and higher in microdomains of the cell.The cell modulates these calcium signals with endogenous calciumbuffers, including physiological buffering by organelles such asmitochondria, endoplasmic reticulum and Golgi. Mitochondrial uptake ofcalcium through a uniporter in the inner membrane is driven by the largenegative mitochondrial membrane potential, and the accumulated calciumis released slowly through sodium-dependent and -independent exchangers,and, under some circumstances, the permeability transition pore (PTP).Thus, mitochondria can act as calcium buffers by taking up calciumduring periods of cellular activation and can slowly release it later.Uptake of calcium into the endoplasmic reticulum is regulated by thesarcoplasmic and endoplasmic reticulum calcium ATPase (SERCA). Uptake ofcalcium into the Golgi is mediated by a P-type calcium transport ATPase(PMR1/ATP2C1). Additionally, there is evidence that a significant amountof the calcium released upon IP₃ receptor activation is extruded fromthe cell through the action of the plasma membrane calcium ATPase. Forexample, plasma membrane calcium ATPases provide the dominant mechanismfor calcium clearance in human T cells and Jurkat cells, althoughsodium/calcium exchange also contributes to calcium clearance in human Tcells. Within calcium-storing organelles, calcium ions can be bound tospecialized calcium-buffering proteins, such as, for example,calsequestrins, calreticulins and calnexins. Additionally, there arecalcium-buffering proteins in the cytosol that modulate calcium spikesand assist in redistribution of calcium ions. Thus, proteins and othermolecules that participate in any of these and other mechanisms throughwhich cytosolic calcium levels can be reduced are proteins that areinvolved in, participate in and/or provide for cytoplasmic calciumbuffering. Thus, cytoplasmic calcium buffering helps regulatecytoplasmic Ca²⁺ levels during periods of sustained calcium influxthrough SOC channels or bursts of Ca²⁺ release. Large increases incytoplasmic Ca2+ levels or store refilling deactivate SOCE.

Downstream Calcium Entry-Mediated Events

In addition to intracellular changes in calcium stores, store-operatedcalcium entry affects a multitude of events that are consequent to or inaddition to the store-operated changes. For example Ca²⁺ influx resultsin the activation of a large number of calmodulin-dependent enzymesincluding the serine phosphatase calcineurin. Activation of calcineurinby an increase in intracellular calcium results in acute secretoryprocesses such as mast cell degranulation. Activated mast cells releasepreformed granules containing histamine, heparin, TNFα and enzymes suchas β-hexosaminidase. Some cellular events, such as B and T cellproliferation, require sustained calcineurin signaling, which requires asustained increase in intracellular calcium. A number of transcriptionfactors are regulated by calcineurin, including NFAT (nuclear factor ofactivated T cells), MEF2 and NFκB. NFAT transcription factors playimportant roles in many cell types, including immune cells. In immunecells NFAT mediates transcription of a large number of molecules,including cytokines, chemokines and cell surface receptors.Transcriptional elements for NFAT have been found within the promotersof cytokines such as IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-8, IL-13, as well astumor necrosis factor alpha (TNFα), granulocyte colony-stimulatingfactor (G-CSF), and gamma-interferon (γ-IFN).

The activity of NFAT proteins is regulated by their phosphorylationlevel, which in turn is regulated by both calcineurin and NFAT kinases.Activation of calcineurin by an increase in intracellular calcium levelsresults in dephosphorylation of NFAT and entry into the nucleus.Rephosphorylation of NFAT masks the nuclear localization sequence ofNFAT and prevents its entry into the nucleus. Because of its strongdependence on calcineurin-mediated dephosphorylation for localizationand activity, NFAT is a sensitive indicator of intracellular freecalcium levels.

Diseases, Disorders or Conditions

Clinical studies demonstrate that the CRAC channel is absolutelyrequired for the activation of genes underlying the T cell response toantigen. Sustained calcium entry is needed for lymphocyte activation andadaptive immune response. Calcium entry into lymphocytes occursprimarily through the CRAC channels. Increased calcium leads to NFATactivation and expression of cytokines required for immune responseInhibiting the store operated calcium entry is an efficient way toprevent T cell activation.

Inhibition of CRAC channel activity with the compounds described herein,such as compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) provide ameans for providing immunosuppressive therapy as demonstrated by theelimination of store-operated calcium entry noted in patients withsevere-combined immunodeficiency (SCID). T cells, fibroblasts, and insome cases B cells, from patients with T cell immunodeficiency or SCIDhaving a principal defect in T cell activation show a strong defect instore-operated calcium entry (Feske et al. (2001) Nature Immunol.2:316-324; Paratiseti et al. (1994) J. Biol. Chem. 269:32327-32335; andLe Deist et al. (1995) Blood 85:1053-1062). SCID patients lack adaptiveimmune response, but without any impairment or toxicity in major organs.The SCID patient phenotype indicates that inhibition of CRAC channels isan effective strategy for immunosuppression.

Diseases/Disorders Involving Inflammation and Diseases/Disorders Relatedto the Immune System

Diseases or disorders that can be treated or prevented using thecompounds, compositions, and methods provided herein include diseasesand disorders involving inflammation and/or that are related to theimmune system. These diseases include but are not limited to asthma,chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, rheumatoid arthritis,inflammatory bowel disease, glomerulonephritis, neuroinflammatorydiseases such as multiple sclerosis, and disorders of the immune system.

The activation of neutrophils (PMN) by inflammatory mediators is partlyachieved by increasing cytosolic calcium concentration. Store-operatedcalcium influx in particular is thought to play an important role in PMNactivation. It has been shown that trauma increases PMN store-operatedcalcium influx (Hauser et al. (2000) J. Trauma Injury Infection andCritical Care 48 (4):592-598) and that prolonged elevations of cytosoliccalcium concentration due to enhanced store-operated calcium influx mayalter stimulus-response coupling to chemotaxins and contribute to PMNdysfunction after injury. Modulation of PMN cytosolic calciumconcentration through store-operated calcium channels might therefore beuseful in regulating PMN-mediated inflammation and spare cardiovascularfunction after injury, shock or sepsis (Hauser et al. (2001) J.Leukocyte Biology 69 (1):63-68).

Calcium plays a critical role in lymphocyte activation. Activation oflymphocytes, e.g., by antigen stimulation, results in rapid increases inintracellular free calcium concentration and activation of transcriptionfactors, including nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT), NF-κB,JNK1, MEF2 and CREB. NFAT is a key transcriptional regulator of the IL-2(and other cytokine) genes (see, e.g. Lewis (2001) Annu. Rev. Immunol19:497-521). A sustained elevation of intracellular calcium level isrequired to keep NFAT in a transcriptionally active state, and isdependent on store-operated calcium entry. Reduction or blocking ofstore-operated calcium entry in lymphocytes blocks calcium-dependentlymphocyte activation. Thus, modulation of intracellular calcium, andparticularly store-operated calcium entry (e.g., reduction in,elimination of store-operated calcium entry), in lymphocytes can be amethod for treating immune and immune-related disorders, including, forexample, chronic immune diseases/disorders, acute immunediseases/disorders, autoimmune and immunodeficiency diseases/disorders,diseases/disorders involving inflammation, organ transplant graftrejections and graft-versus-host disease and altered (e.g., hyperactive)immune responses. For example treatment of an autoimmunedisease/disorder might involve reducing, blocking or eliminatingstore-operated calcium entry in lymphocytes.

Examples of immune disorders include psoriasis, rheumatoid arthritis,vasculitis, inflammatory bowel disease, dermatitis, osteoarthritis,asthma, inflammatory muscle disease, allergic rhinitis, vaginitis,interstitial cystitis, scleroderma, osteoporosis, eczema, allogeneic orxenogeneic transplantation (organ, bone marrow, stem cells and othercells and tissues) graft rejection, graft-versus-host disease, lupuserythematosus, inflammatory disease, type I diabetes, pulmonaryfibrosis, dermatomyositis, Sjogren's syndrome, thyroiditis (e.g.,Hashimoto's and autoimmune thyroiditis), myasthenia gravis, autoimmunehemolytic anemia, multiple sclerosis, cystic fibrosis, chronic relapsinghepatitis, primary biliary cirrhosis, allergic conjunctivitis and atopicdermatitis.

Cancer and Other Proliferative Diseases

Compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), compositionsthereof, and methods provided herein may be used in connection withtreatment of malignancies, including, but not limited to, malignanciesof lymphoreticular origin, bladder cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer,endometrial cancer, head and neck cancer, lung cancer, melanoma, ovariancancer, prostate cancer and rectal cancer. Store-operated calcium entrymay play an important role in cell proliferation in cancer cells (Weisset al. (2001) International Journal of Cancer 92 (6):877-882).

Inhibition of SOCE is sufficient to prevent tumor cell proliferation.The pyrazole derivative BTP-2, a direct I_(CRAC) blocker inhibits SOCEand proliferation in Jurkat cells (Zitt et al., J. Biol. Chem., 279,12427-12437, 2004) and in colon cancer cells. It has been suggested thatsustained SOCE requires mitochondrial Ca²⁺ uptake (Nunez et al., J.Physiol. 571.1, 57-73, 2006) and that prevention of mitochondrial Ca²⁺uptake leads to SOCE inhibition (Hoth et al., P.N.A.S., 97, 10607-10612,2000; Hoth et al., J. Cell. Biol. 137, 633-648, 1997; Glitsch et al.,EMBO J., 21, 6744-6754, 2002). Stimulation of Jurkat cells inducessustained SOCE and activation of the Ca²⁺-dependent phosphatasecalcineurin that dephosphorylates NFAT, promoting expression ofinterleukin-2 and proliferation. Compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) inhibit SOCE and may be used in the treatment of cancer orother proliferative diseases or conditions.

Liver Diseases and Disorders

Diseases or disorders that can be treated or prevented using thecompounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), compositionsthereof, and methods provided herein include hepatic or liver diseasesand disorders. These diseases and disorders include but are not limitedto liver injury, for example, due to transplantation, hepatitis andcirrhosis.

Store-operated calcium entry has been implicated in chronic liverdisease (Tao et al. (1999) J. Biol. Chem., 274(34):23761-23769) as wellas transplantation injury after cold preservation-warm reoxygenation(Elimadi et al. (2001) Am J. Physiology, 281(3 Part 1):G809-G815).

Kidney Diseases and Disorders

Diseases or disorders that can be treated or prevented using the methodsprovided herein include kidney or renal diseases and disorders.Mesangial cell hyperplasia is often a key feature of such diseases anddisorders. Such diseases and disorders may be caused by immunological orother mechanisms of injury, including IgAN, membranoproliferativeglomerulonephritis or lupus nephritis. Imbalances in the control ofmesangial cell replication also appear to play a key role in thepathogenesis of progressive renal failure.

The turnover of mesangial cells in normal adult kidney is very low witha renewal rate of less than 1%. A prominent feature of glomerular/kidneydiseases is mesangial hyperplasia due to elevated proliferation rate orreduced cell loss of mesangial cells. When mesangial cell proliferationis induced without cell loss, for example due to mitogenic stimulation,mesangioproliferative glomerulonephritis can result. Data have indicatedthat regulators of mesangial cell growth, particularly growth factors,may act by regulating store-operated calcium channels (Ma et al. (2001)J Am. Soc. Of Nephrology, 12:(1) 47-53). Modulators of store-operatedcalcium influx may aid in the treatment of glomerular diseases byinhibiting mesangial cell proliferation.

Store Operated Calcium Channels

Clinical studies demonstrate that the CRAC channel, a type of SOCchannel, is absolutely required for the activation of genes underlyingthe T cell response to antigen (Partiseti et al., J Biol. Chem., 269,32327-32335, 1994; Feske et al., Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241, 2005). SOCEcan contribute directly to the elevation of cytosolic Ca²⁺ levels([Ca²⁺]_(i)), as in T lymphocytes where CRAC channels generate thesustained Ca²⁺ signals needed to drive gene expression underlying T cellactivation by antigen. Sustained calcium entry is needed for lymphocyteactivation and adaptive immune response. Calcium entry into lymphocytesoccurs primarily through the CRAC channels. Increased calcium levelslead to NFAT activation and expression of cytokines required for immuneresponse.

The CRAC channel has a distinctive biophysical fingerprint, quantifiablestore-dependence, and essential function in T cells. Studies have shownthat CRAC channels are formed from two component proteins, whichinteract to form CRAC channels. The CRAC channel is assembled by twofunctional components, STIM1 and Orai1. STIM1 (stromal interactionmolecule 1) was identified as the mammalian ER Ca²⁺ sensor (Liou, J. etal. Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241 (2005); Roos, J. et al. J. Cell Biol. 169,435-445 (2005); WO 20041078995; US 2007/0031814). Orai1/CRACM1 wasidentified as a component of the mammalian CRAC channel (Feske, S. etal. Nature 441, 179-185 (2006); Vig, M. et al. Science 312, 1220-1223(2006); Zhang, S. L. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103, 9357-9362(2006)).

STIM1 is the sensor of Ca²⁺ within ER Ca²⁺ stores, moving in response tostore depletion into ER puncta close to the plasma membrane. Orai1 is apore forming CRAC channel subunit in the plasma membrane. The twomembrane proteins STIM1 and Orai1 have each been shown to be essentialfor the activation of CRAC channels.

Expression of both STIM1 and Orai1 in human embryonic kidney 293 cells(HEK293 cells) reconstitute functional CRAC channels. Expression ofOrai1 alone strongly reduces store-operated Ca²⁺ entry in HEK293 cellsand the Ca²⁺ release-activated Ca²⁺ current (I_(CRAC)) in rat basophilicleukemia cells. However, expressed along with the store-sensing STIM1protein, Orai1 causes a massive increase in SOCE, enhancing the rate ofCa²⁺ entry by up to 103-fold. This Ca²⁺ entry is entirely storedependent since the same co-expression causes no measurablestore-independent Ca²⁺ entry. The entry is completely blocked by thestore operated channel blocker, 2-aminoethoxydiphenylborate. STIMproteins are mediate Ca²⁺ store-sensing and endoplasmic reticulum-plasmamembrane coupling with no intrinsic channel properties. Orai1contributes the plasma membrane channel component responsible for Ca²⁺entry. The suppression of CRAC channel function by Orai1 overexpressionreflects a required stoichiometry between STIM1 and Orai1 (Soboloff etal., J. Biol. Chem. Vol. 281, no. 30, 20661-20665, 2006).

Stromal Interacting Molecule (STIM) Proteins

In an RNAi screen in Drosophila S2 cells using thapsigargin-activatedCa²⁺ entry as a marker for store-operated channels one gene gave asubstantially reduced Ca²⁺ entry, and that gene coded for the proteinstromal interaction molecule (Stim) (Roos, J. et al. J. Cell Biol. 169,435-445, 2005). There are two homologues of Stim in mammalian cells,STIM1 and STIM2, both of which appear to be distributed ubiquitously(Williams et al., Biochem J. 2001 August 1; 357(Pt 3):673-85). STIM1 isthe ER Ca²⁺ sensor for store-operated Ca²⁺ entry. STIM1 is a 77 kDa typeI membrane protein with multiple predicted protein interaction orsignaling domains and is located predominantly in the ER, but also to alimited extent in the plasma membrane.

Knockdown of STIM1 by RNAi substantially reduced I_(CRAC) in Jurkat Tcells, and store-operated Ca²⁺ entry in HEK293 epithelial cells andSH-SY5Y neuroblastoma cells. However, knockdown of the closely relatedSTIM2 had no effect. These results indicate an essential role of STIM(Drosophila) and STIM1 (mammals) in the mechanism of activation ofstore-operated channels. It is unlikely that STIM1 is the store-operatedchannel itself. It has no channel-like sequence, and overexpression ofthe protein only modestly enhances Ca²⁺ entry. STIM1 is located both onthe plasma membrane and intracellular membranes like the ER (Manji etal., Biochim Biophys Acta. 2000 August 31; 1481(1):147-55. 2000). Theprotein sequence suggests that it spans the membrane once, with its NH₂terminus oriented toward the lumen of the ER or the extracellular space.The NH₂ terminus contains an EF-hand domain, and functions as the Ca²⁺sensor in the ER. The protein also contains protein-protein interactiondomains, notably coiled-coiled domains in the cytoplasm and a sterilemotif (SAM) in the ER (or extracellular space), both near the predictedtransmembrane domain. STIM1 can oligomerize and thus the protein in theER and plasma membrane could interact bridging the two (Roos, J. et al.J. Cell Biol. 169, 435-445 (2005)).

Total internal reflection fluorescence (TIRF) and confocal microscopyreveal that STIM1 is distributed throughout the ER when Ca²⁺ stores arefull, but redistributes into discrete puncta near the plasma membrane onstore depletion. Although the redistribution of STIM1 into junctional ERregions is slow (Liou, J. et al. Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241 (2005);Zhang, S. L. et al. Nature 437, 902-905 (2005), it does precede theopening of CRAC channels by several seconds (Wu et al., J. Cell Biol.174, 803-813 (2006)) and is therefore rapid enough to be an essentialstep in the activation of CRAC channels.

It has been suggested that store depletion causes the insertion of STIM1into the plasma membrane where it may control store operated calciumentry through the CRAC channels (Zhang, S. L. et al. Nature 437, 902-905(2005); Spassova, M. A. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103, 4040-4045(2006)).

The critical evidence for STIM1 as the Ca²⁺ sensor for SOCE is thatmutation of predicted Ca²⁺-binding residues of the EF hand structuralmotif, expected to reduce its affinity for Ca²⁺ and hence mimic thestore-depleted state, causes STIM1 to redistribute spontaneously intopuncta and trigger constitutive Ca²⁺ influx through SOCs even whenstores are full (Spassova, M. A. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103,4040-4045 (2006); Liou, J. et al. Curr. Biol. 15, 1235-1241 (2005)).

Orai Proteins

Orai1 (also known as CRACM1) is a widely expressed, 33 kDa plasmamembrane protein with 4 transmembrane domains and a lack of significantsequence homology to other ion channels (Vig, M. et al. Science 312,1220-1223 (2006); Zhang, S. L. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103,9357-9362 (2006)).

Studies of T cells from human patients with a severe combinedimmunodeficiency (SCID) syndrome, in which T cell receptor engagement orstore depletion failed to activate Ca²⁺ entry, was shown to be due to asingle point mutation in Orai1 (Feske, S. et al. Nature 441, 179-185(2006)).

Other mammalian Orai homologues exist, e.g. Orai2 and Orai3, howevertheir function is not clearly defined. Orai2 and Orai3 can exhibit SOCchannel activity when overexpressed with STIM1 in HEK cells (Mercer, J.C. et al. J. Biol. Chem. 281, 24979-24990 (2006)).

Evidence that Orai1 contributes to the CRAC channel pore was obtained byOrai1 mutagenesis studies. Selectivity of the CRAC channel for Ca²⁺ ionswas shown by mutations at either Glu 106 or Glu 190, which weaken theability of Ca²⁺ binding in order block permeation of monovalent cations(similar to mechanisms described for voltage-gated Ca²⁺ channels)(Yeromin, A. V. et al. Nature 443, 226-229 (2006); Vig, M. et al. Curr.Biol. 16, 2073-2079 (2006); Prakriya, M. et al. Nature 443, 230-233(2006)).

Neutralizing the charge on a pair of aspartates in the I-II loop (Asp110 and Asp 112) reduces block by Gd³⁺ and block of outward current byextracellular Ca²⁺, indicating that these negatively charged sites maypromote accumulation of polyvalent cations near the mouth of the pore.

Currents observed through overexpression of Orai1 closely resembleI_(CRAC), and the fact that Orai1 can form multimers (Yeromin, A. V. etal. Nature 443, 226-229 (2006); Vig, M. et al. Curr. Biol. 16, 2073-2079(2006); Prakriya, M. et al. Nature 443, 230-233 (2006)), makes it likelythat the native CRAC channel is either a multimer of Orai1 alone or incombination with the closely related subunits Orai2 and/or Orai3.

Functional Store Operated Calcium Channels

The characterization of SOC channels has been largely obtained by onetype of SOC channel, the CRAC channel. CRAC channel activity istriggered by the loss of Ca²⁺ from the ER lumen, which is coupled to theopening of CRAC channels in the plasma membrane through the actions ofSTIM1 and Orai1. Depletion of Ca²⁺ is sensed by STIM1, causing it toaccumulate in junctional ER adjacent to the plasma membrane. In aTIRF-based Ca²⁺-imaging study to map the locations of open CRACchannels, [Ca²⁺]_(i) elevations were seen to co-localize with STIM1puncta, showing directly that CRAC channels open only in extremeproximity to these sites (Luik, et al., J. Cell Biol. 174, 815-825(2006)).

In cells co-expressing both STIM1 and Orai1, store depletion causesOrai1 itself to move from a dispersed distribution to accumulate in theplasma membrane directly opposite STIM1, enabling STIM1 to activate thechannel (Luik, et al., J. Cell Biol. 174, 815-825 (2006); Xu, P. et al.Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 350, 969-976 (2006)). Thus, CRAC channelsare formed by apposed clusters of STIM1 in the ER and Orai1 in theplasma membrane. The junctional gap between the ER and plasma membranewhere Orai1/STIM 1 clusters from (about 10-25 nm) may be small enough topermit protein-protein interactions between STIM 1 and Orai1. This issupported by the fact that overexpressed STIM1 and Orai1 can beco-immunoprecipitated (Yeromin, A. V. et al. Nature 443, 226-229 (2006);Vig, M. et al. Curr. Biol. 16, 2073-2079 (2006)).

Thus, STIM1 and Orai1 interact either directly or as members of amultiprotein complex. Support for this was observed when the expressionof the cytosolic portion of STIM1 by itself was sufficient to activateCRAC channels in one study (Huang, G. N. et al. Nature Cell Biol. 8,1003-1010 (2006)), and the effects of deleting the ERM/coiled-coil andother C-terminal domains suggest roles in STIM1 clustering and SOCchannel activation (Baba, Y. et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 103,16704-16709 (2006)). On the luminal side of STIM1, the isolated EF-SAMregion forms dimers and higher-order multimers on removal of Ca²⁺ invitro, indicating that STIM1 oligomerization may be an early step instore operated calcium activation (Stathopulos, et al., J. Biol. Chem.281, 35855-35862 (2006)).

In some embodiments, compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)described herein modulate intracellular calcium, such as, inhibition orreduction of SOCE and/or I_(CRAC). In other embodiments, the modulationby compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) result from avariety of effects, such as, but not limited to, binding to a protein,interaction with a protein, or modulation of interactions, activities,levels or any physical, structural or other property of a proteininvolved in modulating intracellular calcium (e.g. a STIM protein and/orOrai protein).

For example, methods for assessing binding or interaction of a testagent with a protein involved in modulating intracellular calciuminclude NMR, mass spectroscopy, fluorescence spectroscopy, scintillationproximity assays, surface plasmon resonance assays and others. Examplesof methods for assessing modulation of interactions, activities, levelsor any physical, structural or other property of a protein involved inmodulating intracellular calcium include, but are not limited to, FRETassays to assess effects on protein interactions, NMR, X-raycrystallography and circular dichroism to assess effects on proteininteractions and on physical and structural properties of a protein, andactivity assays suitable for assessing a particular activity of aprotein.

Compounds

Compounds described herein modulate intracellular calcium and may beused in the treatment of diseases or conditions where modulation ofintracellular calcium has a beneficial effect. In one embodiment,compounds described herein inhibit store operated calcium entry. In oneembodiment, compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) interruptthe assembly of SOCE units. In another embodiment, compounds of Formula(I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) alter the functional interactions ofproteins that form store operated calcium channel complexes. In oneembodiment, compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) alter thefunctional interactions of STIM1 with Orai1. In other embodiments,compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) are SOC channel poreblockers. In other embodiments, compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) are CRAC channel pore blockers.

In one aspect, compounds described herein inhibit theelectrophysiological current (I_(SOC)) directly associated withactivated SOC channels. In another aspect, compounds described hereininhibit the electrophysiological current (I_(CRAC)) directly associatedwith activated CRAC channels.

The diseases or disorders that may benefit from modulation ofintracellular calcium include, but are not limited to, an immunesystem-related disease (e.g., an autoimmune disease), a disease ordisorder involving inflammation (e.g., asthma, chronic obstructivepulmonary disease, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease,glomerulonephritis, neuroinflammatory diseases, multiple sclerosis, anddisorders of the immune system), cancer or other proliferative disease,kidney disease and liver disease. In one aspect, compounds describedherein may be used as immunosuppressants to prevent transplant graftrejections, allogeneic or xenogeneic transplantation rejection (organ,bone marrow, stem cells, other cells and tissues), graft-versus-hostdisease. Transplant graft rejections can result from tissue or organtransplants. Graft-versus-host disease can result from bone marrow orstem cell transplantation.

Compounds described herein modulate an activity of, modulate aninteraction of, or binds to, or interacts with at least one portion of aprotein in the store operated calcium channel complex. In oneembodiment, compounds described herein modulate an activity of, modulatean interaction of, or binds to, or interacts with at least one portionof a protein in the calcium release activated calcium channel complex.In one aspect, compounds described herein reduce the level of functionalstore operated calcium channel complexes. In one aspect, compoundsdescribed herein reduce the level of activated store operated calciumchannel complexes. In one aspect, store operated calcium channelcomplexes are calcium release activated calcium channel complexes.

Compounds described herein for treatment of a disease or disorder, whenadministered to a subject having a disease or disorder effectivelyreduces, ameliorates or eliminates a symptom or manifestation of thedisease or disorder. Compounds described herein can also be administeredto a subject predisposed to a disease or disorder who does not yetmanifest a symptom of the disease or disorder, prevents or delaysdevelopment of the symptoms. The agent can have such effects alone or incombination with other agents, or may function to enhance a therapeuticeffect of another agent.

Compounds described herein, pharmaceutically acceptable salts,pharmaceutically acceptable prodrugs, or pharmaceutically acceptablesolvates thereof, modulate intracellular calcium, and may be used totreat patients where modulation of intracellular calcium providesbenefit.

In one aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (I):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NR₆—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₆ is H, or C₁-C₆alkyl;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein L₁ is —N(R₆)—. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₆ is hydrogen,or C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I)wherein R₆ is hydrogen. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(I) wherein R₆ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (I) wherein R₆ is methyl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₁ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) whereinR₁ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) whereinR₁ is ethyl. In a further embodiment R₁ is isopropyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₁ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Ina further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₁ is —CF₃. Inyet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₁ is—CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) whereinR₅ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) whereinR₅ is ethyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) whereinR₅ is propyl. In a further embodiment R₅ is isopropyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Ina further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is —CH₂CF₃.In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is—CF₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅is —CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂is naphthyl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substitutedwith two R₃. In yet another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted withthree R₃. In another embodiment, R₃ is independently selected fromhalogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ isindependently selected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. In furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein each R₃ is independentlyselected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment, R₃ is halogen. In afurther embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In another embodiment, R₃ isC₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. In another embodiment,R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. In some embodiments, R₄is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment, isa compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment, isa compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃, R₃is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substitutedwith two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃,R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is2, and R₄ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ isF. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isphenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃. In yet a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₃. In a furtherembodiment, heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole,pyridine, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, isothiazole,pyrazole, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, oxadiazole, thiadiazole,triazole, indole, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzothiazole,benzimidazole, benzoxadiazole, benzothiadiazole, benzotriazole,pyrazolopyridine, imidazopyridine, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine,indolizine, purine, furopyridine, thienopyridine, furopyrrole,furofuran, thienofuran, 1,4-dihydropyrrolopyrrole, thienopyrrole,thienothiophene, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinoxaline, furopyrazole,thienopyrazole, selenophene, selenazole, and benzoisoxazole. In yetanother embodiment heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene,pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, pyrazole,oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, andindole. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is thiadiazole. In a further embodiment, R₂ ispyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrazole. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is thiazole.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃ and R₃ isindependently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is independently selected from halogen andC₁-C₆alkyl. In further embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) whereineach R₃ is independently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment,R₃ is halogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. Inanother embodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. Insome embodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In anotherembodiment, is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with threeR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(I) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and nis 1. In another embodiment, is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with oneR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(I) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula(I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ismethyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is ethyl. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ispropyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is CF₂H. In a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is CF₃.In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula(I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (I), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is—CF₂CF₃. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodimentsof Formula (I), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is methyl. In yet a further embodimentof the aforementioned embodiments of Formula (I), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ isCF₂H. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (I), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is CF₃. In yet a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (I), R₁ is ethyl and R₅ is CF₃.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (II):

-   -   wherein:    -   L₁ is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically        acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug        thereof

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein L₁ is —NHC(═O)—,or —C(═O)NH—. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein L₁ is —NHC(═O)—. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(II) wherein L₁ is —C(═O)NH—.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₁ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) whereinR₁ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₁ is ethyl. In a further embodiment R₁ is isopropyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₁ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl.In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₁ is—CF₃. In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) whereinR₁ is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) whereinR₅ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₅ is ethyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₅ is propyl. In a further embodiment R₅ is isopropyl. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula(II) wherein R₅ is —CF₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound ofFormula (II) wherein R₅ is —CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compoundof Formula (II) wherein R₅ is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂is naphthyl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenyl optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substitutedwith two R₃. In yet another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted withthree R₃. In another embodiment, R₃ is independently selected fromhalogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ isindependently selected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. In furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein each R₃ isindependently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment, R₃ ishalogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment, R₃ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. In anotherembodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. In someembodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment, isa compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment, isa compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃. In yet a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₃. In a furtherembodiment, heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole,pyridine, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, isothiazole,pyrazole, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, oxadiazole, thiadiazole,triazole, indole, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzothiazole,benzimidazole, benzoxadiazole, benzothiadiazole, benzotriazole,pyrazolopyridine, imidazopyridine, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine,indolizine, purine, furopyridine, thienopyridine, furopyrrole,furofuran, thienofuran, 1,4-dihydropyrrolopyrrole, thienopyrrole,thienothiophene, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinoxaline, furopyrazole,thienopyrazole, selenophene, selenazole, and benzoisoxazole. In yetanother embodiment heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene,pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, pyrazole,oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, andindole. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is thiadiazole. In a further embodiment, R₂ ispyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrazole. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is thiazole.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃ and R₃ isindependently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is independently selected from halogen andC₁-C₆alkyl. In further embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) whereineach R₃ is independently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment,R₃ is halogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. Inanother embodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. Insome embodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In anotherembodiment, is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with threeR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(II) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and nis 1. In another embodiment, is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with oneR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(II) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula(II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ismethyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is ethyl. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ispropyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is CF₂H. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ isCF₃. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (II), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is—CF₂CF₃. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodimentsof Formula (II), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is methyl. In yet a further embodimentof the aforementioned embodiments of Formula (II), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ isCF₂H. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (II), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is CF₃. In yet a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (II), R₁ is ethyl and R₅ isCF₃.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (III):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NR₆—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₆ is H, or C₁-C₆alkyl;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein L₁ is —N(R₆)—.In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₆ ishydrogen, or C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₆ is hydrogen. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (III) wherein R₆ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (III) wherein R₆ is methyl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₁ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) whereinR₁ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III)wherein R₁ is ethyl. In a further embodiment R₁ is isopropyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₁ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl.In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₁ is—CF₃. In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) whereinR₁ is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) whereinR₅ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III)wherein R₅ is ethyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₅ is propyl. In a further embodiment R₅ is isopropyl. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (III)wherein R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₅ is —CF₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound ofFormula (III) wherein R₅ is —CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compoundof Formula (III) wherein R₅ is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂is naphthyl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenyloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂is phenyl substituted with one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃. In yet another embodiment, R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃. In another embodiment, R₃ is independentlyselected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is independently selected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. Infurther embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein each R₃ isindependently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment, R₃ ishalogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment, R₃ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. In anotherembodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. In someembodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isphenyl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In anotherembodiment, is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with threeR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1.In another embodiment, is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isphenyl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with oneR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isphenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isphenyl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃. In yet a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₃. In a furtherembodiment, heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole,pyridine, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, isothiazole,pyrazole, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, oxadiazole, thiadiazole,triazole, indole, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzothiazole,benzimidazole, benzoxadiazole, benzothiadiazole, benzotriazole,pyrazolopyridine, imidazopyridine, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine,indolizine, purine, furopyridine, thienopyridine, furopyrrole,furofuran, thienofuran, 1,4-dihydropyrrolopyrrole, thienopyrrole,thienothiophene, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinoxaline, furopyrazole,thienopyrazole, selenophene, selenazole, and benzoisoxazole. In yetanother embodiment heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene,pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, pyrazole,oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, andindole. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is thiadiazole. In a further embodiment, R₂ ispyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrazole. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is thiazole.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃ and R₃ isindependently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is independently selected from halogen andC₁-C₆alkyl. In further embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) whereineach R₃ is independently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment,R₃ is halogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. Inanother embodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. Insome embodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In anotherembodiment, is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted withthree R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (III) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F,and n is 1. In another embodiment, is a compound of Formula (III)wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1.In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with twoR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(III) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and nis 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula(III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ismethyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is ethyl. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ispropyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is CF₂H. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ isCF₃. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodimentof the aforementioned embodiments of Formula (III), R₁ is methyl and R₅is —CF₂CF₃. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementionedembodiments of Formula (III), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is methyl. In yet afurther embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula (III),R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is CF₂H. In yet a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (III), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is CF₃. Inyet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula(III), R₁ is ethyl and R₅ is CF₃.

In another aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (IV):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein L₁ is —NHC(═O)—,or —C(═O)NH—. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein L₁ is —NHC(═O)—. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(IV) wherein L₁ is —C(═O)NH—.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₁ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) whereinR₁ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₁ is ethyl. In a further embodiment R₁ is isopropyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₁ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl.In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₁ is—CF₃. In yet a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) whereinR₁ is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) whereinR₅ is methyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₅ is ethyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₅ is propyl. In a further embodiment R₅ is isopropyl. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₅ isC₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula(IV) wherein R₅ is —CF₂CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compound ofFormula (IV) wherein R₅ is —CF₃. In a further embodiment is a compoundof Formula (IV) wherein R₅ is —CF₂H.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂is naphthyl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenyl optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃. In another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substitutedwith two R₃. In yet another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted withthree R₃. In another embodiment, R₃ is independently selected fromhalogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ isindependently selected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. In furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein each R₃ isindependently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment, R₃ ishalogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment, R₃ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. In anotherembodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. In someembodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment, isa compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment, isa compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃. In yet a furtherembodiment, R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₃. In a furtherembodiment, heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole,pyridine, oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, isothiazole,pyrazole, pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, oxadiazole, thiadiazole,triazole, indole, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzothiazole,benzimidazole, benzoxadiazole, benzothiadiazole, benzotriazole,pyrazolopyridine, imidazopyridine, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine,indolizine, purine, furopyridine, thienopyridine, furopyrrole,furofuran, thienofuran, 1,4-dihydropyrrolopyrrole, thienopyrrole,thienothiophene, quinoline, isoquinoline, quinoxaline, furopyrazole,thienopyrazole, selenophene, selenazole, and benzoisoxazole. In yetanother embodiment heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene,pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, pyrazole,oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole, benzoxazole, benzofuran, andindole. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is thiadiazole. In a further embodiment, R₂ ispyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrazole. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is thiazole.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃ and R₃ isindependently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is independently selected from halogen andC₁-C₆alkyl. In further embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) whereineach R₃ is independently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment,R₃ is halogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment,R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is CF₃. Inanother embodiment, R₄ is F, Cl or Br. In some embodiments, R₄ is F. Insome embodiments, R₄ is Cl. In some embodiments, R₄ is Br.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In anotherembodiment, is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with threeR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 0. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(IV) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, and nis 1. In another embodiment, is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 1. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with oneR₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula(IV) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, and n is2. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, and n is 2.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 1, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (IV) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃, R₃ is F, n is 2, and R₄ is F.

In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments of Formula(IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment of theaforementioned embodiments of Formula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ismethyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is ethyl. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ ispropyl. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is CF₂H. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ isCF₃. In a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is —CH₂CF₃. In a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (IV), R₁ is methyl and R₅ is—CF₂CF₃. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodimentsof Formula (IV), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is methyl. In yet a further embodimentof the aforementioned embodiments of Formula (IV), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ isCF₂H. In yet a further embodiment of the aforementioned embodiments ofFormula (IV), R₁ is CF₃ and R₅ is CF₃. In yet a further embodiment ofthe aforementioned embodiments of Formula (IV), R₁ is ethyl and R₅ isCF₃.

Deuterium (D or ²H) is a stable, non-radioactive isotope of hydrogen andhas an atomic weight of 2.0144. Hydrogen naturally occurs as a mixtureof the isotopes ¹H (hydrogen or protium), D (²H or deuterium), and T (³Hor tritium). The natural abundance of deuterium is 0.015%. Generally, inchemical compounds with an H atom, the H atom actually represents amixture of H and D, with about 0.015% being D. In some embodiments,deuterium-enriched compounds described herein are achieved by eitherexchanging protons with deuterium or via starting materials and/orintermediates enriched with deuterium.

Any combination of the groups described above for the various variablesis contemplated herein.

Throughout the specification, groups and substituents thereof can bechosen to provide stable moieties and compounds.

In one aspect, described herein is a compound of Formula (V):

wherein:

-   -   R₁ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        substituted with at least one R₄;    -   each R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   each R₄ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₅ is H, CH₃, Et, isopropyl or allyl;    -   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically        acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug        thereof.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is arylsubstituted with at least one R₄. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (V) wherein R₂ is naphthyl substituted with at least one R₄. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with at least one R₄. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with one R₄. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl substitutedwith two R₄. In yet another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V)wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₄. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl and R₄ is independentlyselected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl and R₄ isindependently selected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. In furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl and each R₄is independently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl and R₄ is halogen. In afurther embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl andR₄ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂is phenyl and R₄ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl and R₄ is methyl. In anotherembodiment, is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl and R₄ isC₁-C₆haloalkyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V)wherein R₂ is phenyl and R₄ is CF₃.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenylsubstituted with one R₄, and R₄ is F. In another embodiment, is acompound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₄,and R₄ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) whereinR₂ is phenyl substituted with three R₄, and R₄ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with at least one R₄. In a further embodiment isa compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with oneR₄. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₄. In yet a further embodiment is acompound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with threeR₄. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) whereinheteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyridine,oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyrazole,pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, triazole,indole, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzothiazole, benzimidazole,benzoxadiazole, benzothiadiazole, benzotriazole, pyrazolopyridine,imidazopyridine, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine, indolizine, purine,furopyridine, thienopyridine, furopyrrole, furofuran, thienofuran,1,4-dihydropyrrolopyrrole, thienopyrrole, thienothiophene, quinoline,isoquinoline, quinoxaline, furopyrazole, thienopyrazole, selenophene,selenazole, and benzoisoxazole. In yet another embodiment heteroaryl isselected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole,imidazole, isoxazole, pyrazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole,benzoxazole, benzofuran, and indole. In a further embodiment, R₂ ispyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is thiadiazole. In a furtherembodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrazole.In a further embodiment, R₂ is pyrididine. In a further embodiment, R₂is thiazole.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with at least one R₄ and R₄ is independentlyselected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with at least one R₄ and R₄ is independently selected fromhalogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula(V) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with at least one R₄ and eachR₄ is independently selected from F and CH₃. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with atleast one R₄ and R₄ is halogen. In a further embodiment is a compound ofFormula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with at least one R₄and R₄ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) whereinR₂ is heteroaryl substituted with at least one R₄ and R₄ is C₁-C₆alkyl.In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with at least one R₄ and R₄ is methyl. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with at least one R₄ and R₄ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a furtherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroarylsubstituted with at least one R₄ and R₄ is CF₃.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₄, and R₄ is F. In another embodiment,is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted withtwo R₄, and R₄ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V)wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₄, and R₄ is F.

In one embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is aryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment, R₁is naphthyl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In anotherembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is phenyl optionallysubstituted with at least one R₃. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (V) wherein R₁ is unsubstituted phenyl. In another embodiment isa compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is phenyl substituted with one R₃.In another embodiment, R₂ is phenyl substituted with two R₃. In yetanother embodiment, R₁ is phenyl substituted with three R₃. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is independently selected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is halogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. Inanother embodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ ismethyl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is phenylsubstituted with one R₃, and R₃ is F. In another embodiment, is acompound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is phenyl substituted with two R₃,and R₃ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) whereinR₁ is phenyl substituted with three R₃, and R₃ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃. In oneembodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is unsubstitutedheteroaryl. In a further embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) whereinR₁ is heteroaryl substituted with one R₃. In a further embodiment, R₁ isheteroaryl substituted with two R₃. In yet a further embodiment, R₁ isheteroaryl substituted with three R₃. In a further embodiment,heteroaryl is selected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole, pyridine,oxazole, thiazole, imidazole, isoxazole, isothiazole, pyrazole,pyridazine, pyrimidine, pyrazine, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, triazole,indole, benzothiophene, benzoxazole, benzothiazole, benzimidazole,benzoxadiazole, benzothiadiazole, benzotriazole, pyrazolopyridine,imidazopyridine, pyrrolopyridine, pyrrolopyrimidine, indolizine, purine,furopyridine, thienopyridine, furopyrrole, furofuran, thienofuran,1,4-dihydropyrrolopyrrole, thienopyrrole, thienothiophene, quinoline,isoquinoline, quinoxaline, furopyrazole, thienopyrazole, selenophene,selenazole, and benzoisoxazole. In yet another embodiment heteroaryl isselected from furan, thiophene, pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole,imidazole, isoxazole, pyrazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole,benzoxazole, benzofuran, and indole.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃ and heteroaryl isthiazolyl. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁is unsubstituted thiazolyl. In another embodiment is a compound ofFormula (V) wherein R₁ is heteroaryl optionally substituted with atleast one R₃ and heteroaryl is pyridinyl. In another embodiment is acompound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is unsubstituted pyridinyl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ isheteroaryl optionally substituted with at least one R₃ and R₃ isindependently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, and C₁-C₆haloalkyl. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is heteroaryloptionally substituted with at least one R₃ and R₃ is independentlyselected from halogen and C₁-C₆alkyl. In another embodiment, R₃ ishalogen. In a further embodiment, R₃ is F. In another embodiment, R₃ isC₁-C₆alkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is methyl. In anotherembodiment, R₃ is C₁-C₆haloalkyl. In a further embodiment, R₃ is CF₃.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ isheteroaryl substituted with one R₃, and R₃ is F. In another embodiment,is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₁ is heteroaryl substituted withtwo R₃, and R₃ is F. In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V)wherein R₁ is heteroaryl substituted with three R₃, and R₃ is F.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₅ is CH₃. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₅ is Et. Inanother embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₅ is isopropyl.In another embodiment is a compound of Formula (V) wherein R₅ is allyl.

In another embodiment is a compound of Formula V selected from2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2-fluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-6-methylbenzamide;N-(5-(1-ethyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-2,4,6-trifluorobenzamide;2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,4-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1-ethyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1-vinyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(4-methyl-5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2-fluoro-6-methyl-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-methyl-2-(oxazol-2-yl)-4,5′-bithiazol-2′-yl)benzamide.

In one embodiment is a compound having the structure:

In another embodiment is a compound having the structure:

In another embodiment is a compound having the structure:

In another embodiment is a compound having the structure:

In another embodiment is a compound having the structure:

Deuterium (D or ²H) is a stable, non-radioactive isotope of hydrogen andhas an atomic weight of 2.0144. Hydrogen naturally occurs as a mixtureof the isotopes ¹H (hydrogen or protium), D (²H or deuterium), and T (³Hor tritium). The natural abundance of deuterium is 0.015%. Generally, inchemical compounds with an H atom, the H atom actually represents amixture of H and D, with about 0.015% being D. In some embodiments,deuterium-enriched compounds described herein are achieved by eitherexchanging protons with deuterium or via starting materials and/orintermediates enriched with deuterium.

Any combination of the groups described above for the various variablesis contemplated herein.

Throughout the specification, groups and substituents thereof can bechosen to provide stable moieties and compounds.

Further Forms of Compounds

The compounds described herein may in some cases exist as diastereomers,enantiomers, or other stereoisomeric forms. The compounds presentedherein include all diastereomeric, enantiomeric, and epimeric forms aswell as the appropriate mixtures thereof. Separation of stereoisomersmay be performed by chromatography or by the forming diastereomeric andseparation by recrystallization, or chromatography, or any combinationthereof. (Jean Jacques, Andre Collet, Samuel H. Wilen, “Enantiomers,Racemates and Resolutions”, John Wiley And Sons, Inc., 1981, hereinincorporated by reference for this disclosure). Stereoisomers may alsobe obtained by stereoselective synthesis.

In some situations, compounds may exist as tautomers. All tautomers areincluded within the formulas described herein.

The methods and compositions described herein include the use ofamorphous forms as well as crystalline forms (also known as polymorphs).The compounds described herein may be in the form of pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts. As well, active metabolites of these compounds havingthe same type of activity are included in the scope of the presentdisclosure. In addition, the compounds described herein can exist inunsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceutically acceptablesolvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. The solvated forms of thecompounds presented herein are also considered to be disclosed herein.

In some embodiments, compounds described herein may be prepared asprodrugs. A “prodrug” refers to an agent that is converted into theparent drug in vivo. Prodrugs are often useful because, in somesituations, they may be easier to administer than the parent drug. Theymay, for instance, be bioavailable by oral administration whereas theparent is not. The prodrug may also have improved solubility inpharmaceutical compositions over the parent drug. An example, withoutlimitation, of a prodrug would be a compound described herein, which isadministered as an ester (the “prodrug”) to facilitate transmittalacross a cell membrane where water solubility is detrimental to mobilitybut which then is metabolically hydrolyzed to the carboxylic acid, theactive entity, once inside the cell where water-solubility isbeneficial. A further example of a prodrug might be a short peptide(polyaminoacid) bonded to an acid group where the peptide is metabolizedto reveal the active moiety. In certain embodiments, upon in vivoadministration, a prodrug is chemically converted to the biologically,pharmaceutically or therapeutically active form of the compound. Incertain embodiments, a prodrug is enzymatically metabolized by one ormore steps or processes to the biologically, pharmaceutically ortherapeutically active form of the compound.

To produce a prodrug, a pharmaceutically active compound is modifiedsuch that the active compound will be regenerated upon in vivoadministration. The prodrug can be designed to alter the metabolicstability or the transport characteristics of a drug, to mask sideeffects or toxicity, to improve the flavor of a drug or to alter othercharacteristics or properties of a drug. In some embodiments, by virtueof knowledge of pharmacodynamic processes and drug metabolism in vivo,once a pharmaceutically active compound is determined, prodrugs of thecompound are designed. (see, for example, Nogrady (1985) MedicinalChemistry A Biochemical Approach, Oxford University Press, New York,pages 388-392; Silverman (1992), The Organic Chemistry of Drug Designand Drug Action, Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, pages 352-401,Saulnier et al., (1994), Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters,Vol. 4, p. 1985; Rooseboom et al., Pharmacological Reviews, 56:53-102,2004; Miller et al., J. Med. Chem. Vol. 46, no. 24, 5097-5116, 2003;Aesop Cho, “Recent Advances in Oral Prodrug Discovery”, Annual Reportsin Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 41, 395-407, 2006).

Prodrug forms of the herein described compounds, wherein the prodrug ismetabolized in vivo to produce a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) as set forth herein are included within the scope of theclaims. In some cases, some of the herein-described compounds may be aprodrug for another derivative or active compound.

Prodrugs are often useful because, in some situations, they may beeasier to administer than the parent drug. They may, for instance, bebioavailable by oral administration whereas the parent is not. Theprodrug may also have improved solubility in pharmaceutical compositionsover the parent drug. Prodrugs may be designed as reversible drugderivatives, for use as modifiers to enhance drug transport tosite-specific tissues. In some embodiments, the design of a prodrugincreases the effective water solubility. See, e.g., Fedorak et al., Am.J. Physiol., 269:G210-218 (1995); McLoed et al., Gastroenterol,106:405-413 (1994); Hochhaus et al., Biomed. Chrom., 6:283-286 (1992);J. Larsen and H. Bundgaard, Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 37, 87 (1987); J.Larsen et al., Int. J. Pharmaceutics, 47, 103 (1988); Sinkula et al., J.Pharm. Sci., 64:181-210 (1975); T. Higuchi and V. Stella, Pro-drugs asNovel Delivery Systems, Vol. 14 of the A.C.S. Symposium Series; andEdward B. Roche, Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, AmericanPharmaceutical Association and Pergamon Press, 1987, all incorporatedherein for such disclosure).

Sites on the aromatic ring portion of compounds described herein can besusceptible to various metabolic reactions, therefore incorporation ofappropriate substituents on the aromatic ring structures, such as, byway of example only, halogens can reduce, minimize or eliminate thismetabolic pathway.

The compounds described herein may be labeled isotopically (e.g. with aradioisotope) or by other means, including, but not limited to, the useof chromophores or fluorescent moieties, bioluminescent labels,photoactivatable or chemiluminescent labels.

Compounds described herein include isotopically-labeled compounds, whichare identical to those recited in the various formulae and structurespresented herein, but for the fact that one or more atoms are replacedby an atom having an atomic mass or mass number different from theatomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopesthat can be incorporated into the present compounds include isotopes ofhydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, fluorine and chlorine, such as, forexample, ²H, ³H, ¹³C, ¹⁴C, ¹⁵N, ¹⁸O, ¹⁷O, ³⁵S, ¹⁸F, ³⁶Cl, respectively.Certain isotopically-labeled compounds described herein, for examplethose into which radioactive isotopes such as ³H and ¹⁴C areincorporated, are useful in drug and/or substrate tissue distributionassays. Further, substitution with isotopes such as deuterium, i.e., ²H,can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greatermetabolic stability, such as, for example, increased in vivo half-lifeor reduced dosage requirements.

In additional or further embodiments, the compounds described herein aremetabolized upon administration to an organism in need to produce ametabolite that is then used to produce a desired effect, including adesired therapeutic effect.

Compounds described herein may be formed as, and/or used as,pharmaceutically acceptable salts. The type of pharmaceutical acceptablesalts, include, but are not limited to: (1) acid addition salts, formedby reacting the free base form of the compound with a pharmaceuticallyacceptable: inorganic acid, such as, for example, hydrochloric acid,hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, metaphosphoric acid,and the like; or with an organic acid, such as, for example, aceticacid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid,glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid,malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, trifluoroacetic acid, tartaricacid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoic acid,cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid,1,2-ethanedisulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonicacid, toluenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid,4-methylbicyclo-[2.2.2]oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid,4,4′-methylenebis-(3-hydroxy-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid), 3-phenylpropionicacid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuricacid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylicacid, stearic acid, muconic acid, butyric acid, phenylacetic acid,phenylbutyric acid, valproic acid, and the like; (2) salts formed whenan acidic proton present in the parent compound is replaced by a metalion, e.g., an alkali metal ion (e.g. lithium, sodium, potassium), analkaline earth ion (e.g. magnesium, or calcium), or an aluminum ion. Insome cases, compounds described herein may coordinate with an organicbase, such as, but not limited to, ethanolamine, diethanolamine,triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine, dicyclohexylamine,tris(hydroxymethyl)methylamine. In other cases, compounds describedherein may form salts with amino acids such as, but not limited to,arginine, lysine, and the like. Acceptable inorganic bases used to formsalts with compounds that include an acidic proton, include, but are notlimited to, aluminum hydroxide, calcium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide,sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and the like.

It should be understood that a reference to a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt includes the solvent addition forms or crystal formsthereof, particularly solvates or polymorphs. Solvates contain eitherstoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts of a solvent, and may beformed during the process of crystallization with pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. Hydrates areformed when the solvent is water, or alcoholates are formed when thesolvent is alcohol. Solvates of compounds described herein can beconveniently prepared or formed during the processes described herein.In addition, the compounds provided herein can exist in unsolvated aswell as solvated forms. In general, the solvated forms are consideredequivalent to the unsolvated forms for the purposes of the compounds andmethods provided herein.

In some embodiments, compounds described herein, such as compounds ofFormula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), are in various forms, includingbut not limited to, amorphous forms, milled forms and nano-particulateforms. In addition, compounds described herein include crystallineforms, also known as polymorphs. Polymorphs include the differentcrystal packing arrangements of the same elemental composition of acompound. Polymorphs usually have different X-ray diffraction patterns,melting points, density, hardness, crystal shape, optical properties,stability, and solubility. Various factors such as the recrystallizationsolvent, rate of crystallization, and storage temperature may cause asingle crystal form to dominate.

The screening and characterization of the pharmaceutically acceptablesalts, polymorphs and/or solvates may be accomplished using a variety oftechniques including, but not limited to, thermal analysis, x-raydiffraction, spectroscopy, vapor sorption, and microscopy. Thermalanalysis methods address thermo chemical degradation or thermo physicalprocesses including, but not limited to, polymorphic transitions, andsuch methods are used to analyze the relationships between polymorphicforms, determine weight loss, to find the glass transition temperature,or for excipient compatibility studies. Such methods include, but arenot limited to, Differential scanning calorimetry (DSC), ModulatedDifferential Scanning calorimetry (MDCS), Thermogravimetric analysis(TGA), and Thermogravi-metric and Infrared analysis (TG/IR). X-raydiffraction methods include, but are not limited to, single crystal andpowder diffractometers and synchrotron sources. The variousspectroscopic techniques used include, but are not limited to, Raman,FTIR, UV-VIS, and NMR (liquid and solid state). The various microscopytechniques include, but are not limited to, polarized light microscopy,Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM) with Energy Dispersive X-Ray Analysis(EDX), Environmental Scanning Electron Microscopy with EDX (in gas orwater vapor atmosphere), IR microscopy, and Raman microscopy.

Throughout the specification, groups and substituents thereof can bechosen to provide stable moieties and compounds.

Synthesis of Compounds

In some embodiments, the synthesis of compounds described herein areaccomplished using means described in the chemical literature, using themethods described herein, or by a combination thereof. In addition,solvents, temperatures and other reaction conditions presented hereinmay vary.

In other embodiments, the starting materials and reagents used for thesynthesis of the compounds described herein are synthesized or areobtained from commercial sources, such as, but not limited to,Sigma-Aldrich, FischerScientific (Fischer Chemicals), and AcrosOrganics.

In further embodiments, the compounds described herein, and otherrelated compounds having different substituents are synthesized usingtechniques and materials described herein as well as those that arerecognized in the field, such as described, for example, in Fieser andFieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, Volumes 1-17 (John Wiley andSons, 1991); Rodd's Chemistry of Carbon Compounds, Volumes 1-5 andSupplementals (Elsevier Science Publishers, 1989); Organic Reactions,Volumes 1-40 (John Wiley and Sons, 1991), Larock's Comprehensive OrganicTransformations (VCH Publishers Inc., 1989), March, ADVANCED ORGANICCHEMISTRY 4^(th) Ed., (Wiley 1992); Carey and Sundberg, ADVANCED ORGANICCHEMISTRY 4^(th) Ed., Vols. A and B (Plenum 2000, 2001), and Green andWuts, PROTECTIVE GROUPS IN ORGANIC SYNTHESIS 3^(rd) Ed., (Wiley 1999)(all of which are incorporated by reference for such disclosure).General methods for the preparation of compound as disclosed herein maybe derived from reactions and the reactions may be modified by the useof appropriate reagents and conditions, for the introduction of thevarious moieties found in the formulae as provided herein. As a guidethe following synthetic methods may be utilized.

Formation of Covalent Linkages by Reaction of an Electrophile with aNucleophile

The compounds described herein can be modified using variouselectrophiles and/or nucleophiles to form new functional groups orsubstituents. Table IA entitled “Examples of Covalent Linkages andPrecursors Thereof” lists selected non-limiting examples of covalentlinkages and precursor functional groups which yield the covalentlinkages. Table IA may be used as guidance toward the variety ofelectrophiles and nucleophiles combinations available that providecovalent linkages. Precursor functional groups are shown aselectrophilic groups and nucleophilic groups.

TABLE IA Examples of Covalent Linkages and Precursors Thereof CovalentLinkage Product Electrophile Nucleophile Carboxamides Activated estersamines/anilines Carboxamides acyl azides amines/anilines Carboxamidesacyl halides amines/anilines Esters acyl halides alcohols/phenols Estersacyl nitriles alcohols/phenols Carboxamides acyl nitrilesamines/anilines Imines Aldehydes amines/anilines Alkyl amines alkylhalides amines/anilines Esters alkyl halides carboxylic acids Thioethersalkyl halides Thiols Ethers alkyl halides alcohols/phenols Thioethersalkyl sulfonates Thiols Esters Anhydrides alcohols/phenols CarboxamidesAnhydrides amines/anilines Thiophenols aryl halides Thiols Aryl aminesaryl halides Amines Thioethers Azindines Thiols Carboxamides carboxylicacids amines/anilines Esters carboxylic acids Alcohols hydrazinesHydrazides carboxylic acids N-acylurcas or Anhydrides carbodiimidescarboxylic acids Esters diazoalkanes carboxylic acids ThioethersEpoxides Thiols Thioethers haloacetamides Thiols Ureas Isocyanatesamines/anilines Urethanes Isocyanates alcohols/phenols Thioureasisothiocyanates amines/anilines Thioethers Maleimides Thiols Alkylamines sulfonate esters amines/anilines Thioethers sulfonate estersThiols Sulfonamides sulfonyl halides amines/anilines Sulfonate esterssulfonyl halides phenols/alcohols

Use of Protecting Groups

In the reactions described, it may be necessary to protect reactivefunctional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, imino, thio or carboxygroups, where these are desired in the final product, in order to avoidtheir unwanted participation in reactions. Protecting groups are used toblock some or all of the reactive moieties and prevent such groups fromparticipating in chemical reactions until the protective group isremoved. It is preferred that each protective group be removable by adifferent means. Protective groups that are cleaved under totallydisparate reaction conditions fulfill the requirement of differentialremoval.

Protective groups can be removed by acid, base, reducing conditions(such as, for example, hydrogenolysis), and/or oxidative conditions.Groups such as trityl, dimethoxytrityl, acetal and t-butyldimethylsilylare acid labile and may be used to protect carboxy and hydroxy reactivemoieties in the presence of amino groups protected with Cbz groups,which are removable by hydrogenolysis, and Fmoc groups, which are baselabile. Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may be blockedwith base labile groups such as, but not limited to, methyl, ethyl, andacetyl in the presence of amines blocked with acid labile groups such ast-butyl carbamate or with carbamates that are both acid and base stablebut hydrolytically removable.

Carboxylic acid and hydroxy reactive moieties may also be blocked withhydrolytically removable protective groups such as the benzyl group,while amine groups capable of hydrogen bonding with acids may be blockedwith base labile groups such as Fmoc. Carboxylic acid reactive moietiesmay be protected by conversion to simple ester compounds as exemplifiedherein, which include conversion to alkyl esters, or they may be blockedwith oxidatively-removable protective groups such as2,4-dimethoxybenzyl, while co-existing amino groups may be blocked withfluoride labile silyl carbamates.

Allyl blocking groups are useful in then presence of acid- andbase-protecting groups since the former are stable and can besubsequently removed by metal or pi-acid catalysts. For example, anallyl-blocked carboxylic acid can be deprotected with a Pd⁰-catalyzedreaction in the presence of acid labile t-butyl carbamate or base-labileacetate amine protecting groups. Yet another form of protecting group isa resin to which a compound or intermediate may be attached. As long asthe residue is attached to the resin, that functional group is blockedand cannot react. Once released from the resin, the functional group isavailable to react.

Typically blocking/protecting groups may be selected from:

Other protecting groups, plus a detailed description of techniquesapplicable to the creation of protecting groups and their removal aredescribed in Greene and Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis,3rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y., 1999, and Kocienski,Protective Groups, Thieme Verlag, New York, N.Y., 1994, which areincorporated herein by reference for such disclosure).

CERTAIN TERMINOLOGY

Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used hereinhave the same meaning as is commonly understood to which the claimedsubject matter belongs. In the event that there are a plurality ofdefinitions for terms herein, those in this section prevail. Allpatents, patent applications, publications and published nucleotide andamino acid sequences (e.g., sequences available in GenBank or otherdatabases) referred to herein are incorporated by reference. Wherereference is made to a URL or other such identifier or address, it isunderstood that such identifiers can change and particular informationon the internet can come and go, but equivalent information can be foundby searching the internet. Reference thereto evidences the availabilityand public dissemination of such information.

It is to be understood that the foregoing general description and thefollowing detailed description are exemplary and explanatory only andare not restrictive of any subject matter claimed. In this application,the use of the singular includes the plural unless specifically statedotherwise. It must be noted that, as used in the specification and theappended claims, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include pluralreferents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. In thisapplication, the use of “or” means “and/or” unless stated otherwise.Furthermore, use of the term “including” as well as other forms, such as“include”, “includes,” and “included,” is not limiting.

The section headings used herein are for organizational purposes onlyand are not to be construed as limiting the subject matter described.

Definition of standard chemistry terms may be found in reference works,including but not limited to, Carey and Sundberg “ADVANCED ORGANICCHEMISTRY 4^(TH) ED.” Vols. A (2000) and B (2001), Plenum Press, NewYork. Unless otherwise indicated, conventional methods of massspectroscopy, NMR, HPLC, protein chemistry, biochemistry, recombinantDNA techniques and pharmacology.

Unless specific definitions are provided, the nomenclature employed inconnection with, and the laboratory procedures and techniques of,analytical chemistry, synthetic organic chemistry, and medicinal andpharmaceutical chemistry described herein are those recognized in thefield. Standard techniques can be used for chemical syntheses, chemicalanalyses, pharmaceutical preparation, formulation, and delivery, andtreatment of patients. Standard techniques can be used for recombinantDNA, oligonucleotide synthesis, and tissue culture and transformation(e.g., electroporation, lipofection). Reactions and purificationtechniques can be performed e.g., using kits of manufacturer'sspecifications or as commonly accomplished in the art or as describedherein. The foregoing techniques and procedures can be generallyperformed of conventional methods and as described in various generaland more specific references that are cited and discussed throughout thepresent specification.

It is to be understood that the methods and compositions describedherein are not limited to the particular methodology, protocols, celllines, constructs, and reagents described herein and as such may vary.It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for thepurpose of describing particular embodiments only, and is not intendedto limit the scope of the methods, compounds, compositions describedherein.

As used herein, C₁-C_(x) includes C₁-C₂, C₁-C₃ . . . C₁-C_(x). C₁-C_(x)refers to the number of carbon atoms that make up the moiety to which itdesignates (excluding optional substituents).

An “alkyl” group refers to an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. The alkylgroups may or may not include units of unsaturation. The alkyl moietymay be a “saturated alkyl” group, which means that it does not containany units of unsaturation (i.e. a carbon-carbon double bond or acarbon-carbon triple bond). The alkyl group may also be an “unsaturatedalkyl” moiety, which means that it contains at least one unit ofunsaturation. The alkyl moiety, whether saturated or unsaturated, may bebranched, straight chain, or cyclic.

The “alkyl” group may have 1 to 6 carbon atoms (whenever it appearsherein, a numerical range such as “1 to 6” refers to each integer in thegiven range; e.g., “1 to 6 carbon atoms” means that the alkyl group mayconsist of 1 carbon atom, 2 carbon atoms, 3 carbon atoms, etc., up toand including 6 carbon atoms, although the present definition alsocovers the occurrence of the term “alkyl” where no numerical range isdesignated). The alkyl group of the compounds described herein may bedesignated as “C₁-C₆ alkyl” or similar designations. By way of exampleonly, “C₁-C₆ alkyl” indicates that there are one to six carbon atoms inthe alkyl chain, i.e., the alkyl chain is selected from the groupconsisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl,sec-butyl, t-butyl, n-pentyl, iso-pentyl, neo-pentyl, hexyl, propen-3-yl(allyl), cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl,cyclohexylmethyl. Alkyl groups can be substituted or unsubstituted.Depending on the structure, an alkyl group can be a monoradical or adiradical (i.e., an alkylene group).

An “alkoxy” refers to a “—O-alkyl” group, where alkyl is as definedherein.

The term “alkenyl” refers to a type of alkyl group in which the firsttwo atoms of the alkyl group form a double bond that is not part of anaromatic group. That is, an alkenyl group begins with the atoms—C(R)═CR₂, wherein R refers to the remaining portions of the alkenylgroup, which may be the same or different. Non-limiting examples of analkenyl group include —CH═CH₂, —C(CH₃)═CH₂, —CH═CHCH₃, —CH═C(CH₃)₂ and—C(CH₃)═CHCH₃. The alkenyl moiety may be branched, straight chain, orcyclic (in which case, it would also be known as a “cycloalkenyl”group). Alkenyl groups may have 2 to 6 carbons. Alkenyl groups can besubstituted or unsubstituted. Depending on the structure, an alkenylgroup can be a monoradical or a diradical (i.e., an alkenylene group).

The term “alkynyl” refers to a type of alkyl group in which the firsttwo atoms of the alkyl group form a triple bond. That is, an alkynylgroup begins with the atoms —C≡C—R, wherein R refers to the remainingportions of the alkynyl group. Non-limiting examples of an alkynyl groupinclude —C≡CH, —C≡CCH₃, —C≡CCH₂CH₃ and —C≡CCH₂CH₂CH₃. The “R” portion ofthe alkynyl moiety may be branched, straight chain, or cyclic. Analkynyl group can have 2 to 6 carbons. Alkynyl groups can be substitutedor unsubstituted. Depending on the structure, an alkynyl group can be amonoradical or a diradical (i.e., an alkynylene group).

“Amino” refers to a —NH₂ group.

The term “alkylamine” or “alkylamino” refers to the —N(alkyl)_(x)H_(y)group, where alkyl is as defined herein and x and y are selected fromthe group x=1, y=1 and x=2, y=0. When x=2, the alkyl groups, takentogether with the nitrogen to which they are attached, can optionallyform a cyclic ring system. “Dialkylamino” refers to a —N(alkyl)₂ group,where alkyl is as defined herein.

The term “aromatic” refers to a planar ring having a delocalizedπ-electron system containing 4n+2 π electrons, where n is an integer.Aromatic rings can be formed from five, six, seven, eight, nine, or morethan nine atoms. Aromatics can be optionally substituted. The term“aromatic” includes both aryl groups (e.g., phenyl, naphthalenyl) andheteroaryl groups (e.g., pyridinyl, quinolinyl).

As used herein, the term “aryl” refers to an aromatic ring wherein eachof the atoms forming the ring is a carbon atom. Aryl rings can be formedby five, six, seven, eight, nine, or more than nine carbon atoms. Arylgroups can be optionally substituted. Examples of aryl groups include,but are not limited to phenyl, and naphthalenyl. Depending on thestructure, an aryl group can be a monoradical or a diradical (i.e., anarylene group).

“Carboxy” refers to —CO₂H. In some embodiments, carboxy moieties may bereplaced with a “carboxylic acid bioisostere”, which refers to afunctional group or moiety that exhibits similar physical and/orchemical properties as a carboxylic acid moiety. A carboxylic acidbioisostere has similar biological properties to that of a carboxylicacid group. A compound with a carboxylic acid moiety can have thecarboxylic acid moiety exchanged with a carboxylic acid bioisostere andhave similar physical and/or biological properties when compared to thecarboxylic acid-containing compound. For example, in one embodiment, acarboxylic acid bioisostere would ionize at physiological pH to roughlythe same extent as a carboxylic acid group. Examples of bioisosteres ofa carboxylic acid include, but are not limited to,

and the like.

The term “cycloalkyl” refers to a monocyclic or polycyclic non-aromaticradical, wherein each of the atoms forming the ring (i.e. skeletalatoms) is a carbon atom. Cycloalkyls may be saturated, or partiallyunsaturated. Cycloalkyls may be fused with an aromatic ring (in whichcase the cycloalkyl is bonded through a non-aromatic ring carbon atom).Cycloalkyl groups include groups having from 3 to 10 ring atoms.Illustrative examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limitedto, the following moieties:

and the like.

The terms “heteroaryl” or, alternatively, “heteroaromatic” refers to anaryl group that includes one or more ring heteroatoms selected fromnitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. An N-containing “heteroaromatic” or“heteroaryl” moiety refers to an aromatic group in which at least one ofthe skeletal atoms of the ring is a nitrogen atom. Polycyclic heteroarylgroups may be fused or non-fused. Illustrative examples of heteroarylgroups include the following moieties:

and the like.

A “heterocycloalkyl” group or “heteroalicyclic” group refers to acycloalkyl group, wherein at least one skeletal ring atom is aheteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. The radicals maybe fused with an aryl or heteroaryl. Illustrative examples ofheterocycloalkyl groups, also referred to as non-aromatic heterocycles,include:

and the like. The term heteroalicyclic also includes all ring forms ofthe carbohydrates, including but not limited to the monosaccharides, thedisaccharides and the oligosaccharides. Unless otherwise noted,heterocycloalkyls have from 2 to 10 carbons in the ring. It isunderstood that when referring to the number of carbon atoms in aheterocycloalkyl, the number of carbon atoms in the heterocycloalkyl isnot the same as the total number of atoms (including the heteroatoms)that make up the heterocycloalkyl (i.e. skeletal atoms of theheterocycloalkyl ring).

The term “halo” or, alternatively, “halogen” means fluoro, chloro, bromoand iodo.

The term “haloalkyl” refers to an alkyl group that is substituted withone or more halogens. The halogens may the same or they may bedifferent. Non-limiting examples of haloalkyls include —CH₂Cl, —CF₃,—CHF₂, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF(CH₃)₃, and the like.

The terms “fluoroalkyl” and “fluoroalkoxy” include alkyl and alkoxygroups, respectively, that are substituted with one or more fluorineatoms. Non-limiting examples of fluoroalkyls include —CF₃, —CHF₂, —CH₂F,—CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₂CF₃, —CF(CH₃)₃, and the like. Non-limitingexamples of fluoroalkoxy groups, include —OCF₃, —OCHF₂, —OCH₂F,—OCH₂CF₃, —OCF₂CF₃, —OCF₂CF₂CF₃, —OCF(CH₃)₂, and the like.

The term “heteroalkyl” refers to an alkyl radical where one or moreskeletal chain atoms is selected from an atom other than carbon, e.g.,oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon, or combinations thereof.The heteroatom(s) may be placed at any interior position of theheteroalkyl group. Examples include, but are not limited to, —CH₂—O—CH₃,—CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₃, —CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—N(CH₃)—CH₃,—CH₂—CH₂—NH—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—N(CH₃)—CH₃, —CH₂—S—CH₂—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂,—S(O)—CH₃, —CH₂—CH₂—S(O)₂—CH₃, —CH₂—NH—OCH₃, —CH₂—O—Si(CH₃)₃,—CH₂—CH═N—OCH₃, and —CH═CH—N(CH₃)—CH₃. In addition, up to twoheteroatoms may be consecutive, such as, by way of example, —CH₂—NH—OCH₃and —CH₂—O—Si(CH₃)₃. Excluding the number of heteroatoms, a“heteroalkyl” may have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.

The term “bond” or “single bond” refers to a chemical bond between twoatoms, or two moieties when the atoms joined by the bond are consideredto be part of larger substructure.

The term “moiety” refers to a specific segment or functional group of amolecule. Chemical moieties are often recognized chemical entitiesembedded in or appended to a molecule.

As used herein, the substituent “R” appearing by itself and without anumber designation refers to a substituent selected from among fromalkyl, haloalkyl, heteroalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl(bonded through a ring carbon), and heterocycloalkyl.

The term “optionally substituted” or “substituted” means that thereferenced group may be substituted with one or more additional group(s)individually and independently selected from alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl,heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, —OH, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio,alkylsulfoxide, arylsulfoxide, alkylsulfone, arylsulfone, —CN, alkyne,C₁-C₆alkylalkyne, halo, acyl, acyloxy, —CO₂H, —CO₂-alkyl, nitro,haloalkyl, fluoroalkyl, and amino, including mono- and di-substitutedamino groups (e.g. —NH₂, —NHR, —N(R)₂), and the protected derivativesthereof. By way of example, an optional substituents may be L^(s)R^(s),wherein each L^(s) is independently selected from a bond, —O—, —C(═O)—,—S—, —S(═O)—, —S(═O)₂—, —NH—, —NHC(O)—, —C(O)NH—, S(═O)₂NH—, —NHS(═O)₂,—OC(O)NH—, —NHC(O)O—, (C₁-C₆alkyl)-, or —(C₂-C₆alkenyl)-; and each R^(s)is independently selected from among H, (C₁-C₆alkyl), (C₃-C₈cycloalkyl),aryl, heteroaryl, heterocycloalkyl, and C₁-C₆heteroalkyl. The protectinggroups that may form the protective derivatives of the abovesubstituents are found in sources such as Greene and Wuts, above.

The methods and formulations described herein include the use ofcrystalline forms (also known as polymorphs), or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts of compounds having the structure of Formulas (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V), as well as active metabolites of thesecompounds having the same type of activity. In some situations,compounds may exist as tautomers. All tautomers are included within thescope of the compounds presented herein. In addition, the compoundsdescribed herein can exist in unsolvated as well as solvated forms withpharmaceutically acceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and thelike. The solvated forms of the compounds presented herein are alsoconsidered to be disclosed herein.

The terms “kit” and “article of manufacture” are used as synonyms.

The term “subject” or “patient” encompasses mammals and non-mammals.Examples of mammals include, but are not limited to, any member of theMammalian class: humans, non-human primates such as chimpanzees, andother apes and monkey species; farm animals such as cattle, horses,sheep, goats, swine; domestic animals such as rabbits, dogs, and cats;laboratory animals including rodents, such as rats, mice and guineapigs, and the like. Examples of non-mammals include, but are not limitedto, birds, fish and the like. In one embodiment of the methods andcompositions provided herein, the mammal is a human.

The terms “treat,” “treating” or “treatment,” as used herein, includealleviating, abating or ameliorating a disease or condition symptoms,preventing additional symptoms, ameliorating or preventing theunderlying causes of symptoms, inhibiting the disease or condition,e.g., arresting the development of the disease or condition, relievingthe disease or condition, causing regression of the disease orcondition, relieving a condition caused by the disease or condition, orstopping the symptoms of the disease or condition eitherprophylactically and/or therapeutically.

As used herein, the term “target protein” refers to a protein or aportion of a protein capable of being bound by, or interacting with acompound described herein, such as a compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V). In certain embodiments, a target protein is a STIMprotein. In certain embodiments, a target protein is an Orai protein.

As used herein, “STIM protein” includes but is not limited to, mammalianSTIM-1, such as human and rodent (e.g., mouse) STIM-1, Drosophilamelanogaster D-STIM, C. elegans C-STIM, Anopheles gambiae STIM andmammalian STIM-2, such as human and rodent (e.g., mouse) STIM-2. (seeparagraphs [0211] through [0270] of US 2007/0031814, as well as Table 3of US 2007/0031814, herein incorporated by reference) As describedherein, such proteins have been identified as being involved in,participating in and/or providing for store-operated calcium entry ormodulation thereof, cytoplasmic calcium buffering and/or modulation ofcalcium levels in or movement of calcium into, within or out ofintracellular calcium stores (e.g., endoplasmic reticulum).

As used herein, an “Orai protein” includes Orai1 (SEQ ID NO: 1 asdescribed in WO 07/081804), Orai2 (SEQ ID NO: 2 as described in WO07/081804), or Orai3 (SEQ ID NO: 3 as described in WO 07/081804). Orai1nucleic acid sequence corresponds to GenBank accession number NM 032790,Orai2 nucleic acid sequence corresponds to GenBank accession numberBC069270 and Orai3 nucleic acid sequence corresponds to GenBankaccession number NM_(—)152288. As used herein, Orai refers to any one ofthe Orai genes, e.g., Orai1, Orai2, Orai3 (see Table I of WO 07/081804).As described herein, such proteins have been identified as beinginvolved in, participating in and/or providing for store-operatedcalcium entry or modulation thereof, cytoplasmic calcium bufferingand/or modulation of calcium levels in or movement of calcium into,within or out of intracellular calcium stores (e.g., endoplasmicreticulum).

The term “fragment” or “derivative” when referring to a protein (e.g.STIM, Orai) means proteins or polypeptides which retain essentially thesame biological function or activity in at least one assay as the nativeprotein(s). For example, the fragments or derivatives of the referencedprotein maintains at least about 50% of the activity of the nativeproteins, at least 75%, at least about 95% of the activity of the nativeproteins, as determined e.g. by a calcium influx assay.

As used herein, amelioration of the symptoms of a particular disease,disorder or condition by administration of a particular compound orpharmaceutical composition refers to any lessening of severity, delay inonset, slowing of progression, or shortening of duration, whetherpermanent or temporary, lasting or transient that can be attributed toor associated with administration of the compound or composition.

The term “modulate,” as used herein, means to interact with a targetprotein either directly or indirectly so as to alter the activity of thetarget protein, including, by way of example only, to inhibit theactivity of the target, or to limit or reduce the activity of thetarget.

As used herein, the term “modulator” refers to a compound that alters anactivity of a target. For example, a modulator can cause an increase ordecrease in the magnitude of a certain activity of a target compared tothe magnitude of the activity in the absence of the modulator. Incertain embodiments, a modulator is an inhibitor, which decreases themagnitude of one or more activities of a target. In certain embodiments,an inhibitor completely prevents one or more activities of a target.

As used herein, “modulation” with reference to intracellular calciumrefers to any alteration or adjustment in intracellular calciumincluding but not limited to alteration of calcium concentration in thecytoplasm and/or intracellular calcium storage organelles, e.g.,endoplasmic reticulum, and alteration of the kinetics of calcium fluxesinto, out of and within cells. In aspect, modulation refers toreduction.

As used herein, the term “target activity” refers to a biologicalactivity capable of being modulated by a modulator. Certain exemplarytarget activities include, but are not limited to, binding affinity,signal transduction, enzymatic activity, tumor growth, inflammation orinflammation-related processes, and amelioration of one or more symptomsassociated with a disease or condition.

The terms “inhibits”, “inhibiting”, or “inhibitor” of SOC channelactivity or CRAC channel activity, as used herein, refer to inhibitionof store operated calcium channel activity or calcium release activatedcalcium channel activity.

The term “acceptable” with respect to a formulation, composition oringredient, as used herein, means having no persistent detrimentaleffect on the general health of the subject being treated.

By “pharmaceutically acceptable,” as used herein, refers a material,such as a carrier or diluent, which does not abrogate the biologicalactivity or properties of the compound, and is relatively nontoxic,i.e., the material may be administered to an individual without causingundesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious mannerwith any of the components of the composition in which it is contained.

The term “pharmaceutical combination” as used herein, means a productthat results from the mixing or combining of more than one activeingredient and includes both fixed and non-fixed combinations of theactive ingredients. The term “fixed combination” means that one activeingredient, e.g. a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V),and a co-agent, are both administered to a patient simultaneously in theform of a single entity or dosage. The term “non-fixed combination”means that one active ingredient, e.g. a compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V), and a co-agent, are administered to a patient asseparate entities either simultaneously, concurrently or sequentiallywith no specific intervening time limits, wherein such administrationprovides effective levels of the two compounds in the body of thepatient. The latter also applies to cocktail therapy, e.g. theadministration of three or more active ingredients.

The term “pharmaceutical composition” refers to a mixture of a compoundof Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein with otherchemical components, such as carriers, stabilizers, diluents, dispersingagents, suspending agents, thickening agents, and/or excipients. Thepharmaceutical composition facilitates administration of the compound toan organism. Multiple techniques of administering a compound exist inthe art including, but not limited to: intravenous, oral, aerosol,parenteral, ophthalmic, pulmonary and topical administration.

The terms “effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount,” asused herein, refer to a sufficient amount of an agent or a compoundbeing administered which will relieve to some extent one or more of thesymptoms of the disease or condition being treated. The result can bereduction and/or alleviation of the signs, symptoms, or causes of adisease, or any other desired alteration of a biological system. Forexample, an “effective amount” for therapeutic uses is the amount of thecomposition that includes a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV)or (V) described herein required to provide a clinically significantdecrease in disease symptoms. An appropriate “effective” amount in anyindividual case may be determined using techniques, such as a doseescalation study.

The terms “enhance” or “enhancing,” as used herein, means to increase orprolong either in potency or duration a desired effect. Thus, in regardto enhancing the effect of therapeutic agents, the term “enhancing”refers to the ability to increase or prolong, either in potency orduration, the effect of other therapeutic agents on a system. An“enhancing-effective amount,” as used herein, refers to an amountadequate to enhance the effect of another therapeutic agent in a desiredsystem.

The terms “co-administration” or the like, as used herein, are meant toencompass administration of the selected therapeutic agents to a singlepatient, and are intended to include treatment regimens in which theagents are administered by the same or different route of administrationor at the same or different time.

The term “carrier,” as used herein, refers to relatively nontoxicchemical compounds or agents that facilitate the incorporation of acompound into cells or tissues.

The term “diluent” refers to chemical compounds that are used to dilutethe compound of interest prior to delivery. Diluents can also be used tostabilize compounds because they can provide a more stable environment.Salts dissolved in buffered solutions (which also can provide pH controlor maintenance) are utilized as diluents in the art, including, but notlimited to a phosphate buffered saline solution.

A “metabolite” of a compound disclosed herein is a derivative of thatcompound that is formed when the compound is metabolized. The term“active metabolite” refers to a biologically active derivative of acompound that is formed when the compound is metabolized. The term“metabolized,” as used herein, refers to the sum of the processes(including, but not limited to, hydrolysis reactions and reactionscatalyzed by enzymes) by which a particular substance is changed by anorganism. Thus, enzymes may produce specific structural alterations to acompound. For example, cytochrome P450 catalyzes a variety of oxidativeand reductive reactions while uridine diphosphate glucuronyltransferasescatalyze the transfer of an activated glucuronic-acid molecule toaromatic alcohols, aliphatic alcohols, carboxylic acids, amines and freesulphydryl groups. Further information on metabolism may be obtainedfrom The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 9th Edition, McGraw-Hill(1996). Metabolites of the compounds disclosed herein can be identifiedeither by administration of compounds to a host and analysis of tissuesamples from the host, or by incubation of compounds with hepatic cellsin vitro and analysis of the resulting compounds.

“Bioavailability” refers to the percentage of the weight of the compounddisclosed herein (e.g. compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or(V)), that is delivered into the general circulation of the animal orhuman being studied. The total exposure (AUC(0-∞)) of a drug whenadministered intravenously is usually defined as 100% bioavailable (F%). “Oral bioavailability” refers to the extent to which a compounddisclosed herein, is absorbed into the general circulation when thepharmaceutical composition is taken orally as compared to intravenousinjection.

“Blood plasma concentration” refers to the concentration of a compoundof Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) disclosed herein, in theplasma component of blood of a subject. It is understood that the plasmaconcentration of compounds described herein may vary significantlybetween subjects, due to variability with respect to metabolism and/orpossible interactions with other therapeutic agents. In accordance withone embodiment disclosed herein, the blood plasma concentration of thecompounds disclosed herein may vary from subject to subject. Likewise,values such as maximum plasma concentration (Cmax) or time to reachmaximum plasma concentration (Tmax), or total area under the plasmaconcentration time curve (AUC(0-∞)) may vary from subject to subject.Due to this variability, the amount necessary to constitute “atherapeutically effective amount” of a compound may vary from subject tosubject.

As used herein, “calcium homeostasis” refers to the maintenance of anoverall balance in intracellular calcium levels and movements, includingcalcium signaling, within a cell.

As used herein, “intracellular calcium” refers to calcium located in acell without specification of a particular cellular location. Incontrast, “cytosolic” or “cytoplasmic” with reference to calcium refersto calcium located in the cell cytoplasm.

As used herein, an effect on intracellular calcium is any alteration ofany aspect of intracellular calcium, including but not limited to, analteration in intracellular calcium levels and location and movement ofcalcium into, out of or within a cell or intracellular calcium store ororganelle. For example, an effect on intracellular calcium can be analteration of the properties, such as, for example, the kinetics,sensitivities, rate, amplitude, and electrophysiologicalcharacteristics, of calcium flux or movement that occurs in a cell orportion thereof. An effect on intracellular calcium can be an alterationin any intracellular calcium-modulating process, including,store-operated calcium entry, cytosolic calcium buffering, and calciumlevels in or movement of calcium into, out of or within an intracellularcalcium store. Any of these aspects can be assessed in a variety of waysincluding, but not limited to, evaluation of calcium or other ion(particularly cation) levels, movement of calcium or other ion(particularly cation), fluctuations in calcium or other ion(particularly cation) levels, kinetics of calcium or other ion(particularly cation) fluxes and/or transport of calcium or other ion(particularly cation) through a membrane. An alteration can be any suchchange that is statistically significant. Thus, for example ifintracellular calcium in a test cell and a control cell is said todiffer, such difference can be a statistically significant difference.

As used herein, “involved in” with respect to the relationship between aprotein and an aspect of intracellular calcium or intracellular calciumregulation means that when expression or activity of the protein in acell is reduced, altered or eliminated, there is a concomitant orassociated reduction, alteration or elimination of one or more aspectsof intracellular calcium or intracellular calcium regulation. Such analteration or reduction in expression or activity can occur by virtue ofan alteration of expression of a gene encoding the protein or byaltering the levels of the protein. A protein involved in an aspect ofintracellular calcium, such as, for example, store-operated calciumentry, thus, can be one that provides for or participates in an aspectof intracellular calcium or intracellular calcium regulation. Forexample, a protein that provides for store-operated calcium entry can bea STIM protein and/or an Orai protein.

As used herein, a protein that is a component of a calcium channel is aprotein that participates in multi-protein complex that forms thechannel.

As used herein, “basal” or “resting” with reference to cytosolic calciumlevels refers to the concentration of calcium in the cytoplasm of acell, such as, for example, an unstimulated cell, that has not beensubjected to a condition that results in movement of calcium into or outof the cell or within the cell. The basal or resting cytosolic calciumlevel can be the concentration of free calcium (i.e., calcium that isnot bound to a cellular calcium-binding substance) in the cytoplasm of acell, such as, for example, an unstimulated cell, that has not beensubjected to a condition that results in movement of calcium into or outof the cell.

As used herein, “movement” with respect to ions, including cations,e.g., calcium, refers to movement or relocation, such as for exampleflux, of ions into, out of, or within a cell. Thus, movement of ions canbe, for example, movement of ions from the extracellular medium into acell, from within a cell to the extracellular medium, from within anintracellular organelle or storage site to the cytosol, from the cytosolinto an intracellular organelle or storage site, from one intracellularorganelle or storage site to another intracellular organelle or storagesite, from the extracellular medium into an intracellular organelle orstorage site, from an intracellular organelle or storage site to theextracellular medium and from one location to another within the cellcytoplasm.

As used herein, “cation entry” or “calcium entry” into a cell refers toentry of cations, such as calcium, into an intracellular location, suchas the cytoplasm of a cell or into the lumen of an intracellularorganelle or storage site. Thus, cation entry can be, for example, themovement of cations into the cell cytoplasm from the extracellularmedium or from an intracellular organelle or storage site, or themovement of cations into an intracellular organelle or storage site fromthe cytoplasm or extracellular medium. Movement of calcium into thecytoplasm from an intracellular organelle or storage site is alsoreferred to as “calcium release” from the organelle or storage site.

As used herein, “protein that modulates intracellular calcium” refers toany cellular protein that is involved in regulating, controlling and/oraltering intracellular calcium. For example, such a protein can beinvolved in altering or adjusting intracellular calcium in a number ofways, including, but not limited to, through the maintenance of restingor basal cytoplasmic calcium levels, or through involvement in acellular response to a signal that is transmitted in a cell through amechanism that includes a deviation in intracellular calcium fromresting or basal states. In the context of a “protein that modulatesintracellular calcium,” a “cellular” protein is one that is associatedwith a cell, such as, for example, a cytoplasmic protein, a plasmamembrane-associated protein or an intracellular membrane protein.Proteins that modulate intracellular calcium include, but are notlimited to, ion transport proteins, calcium-binding proteins andregulatory proteins that regulate ion transport proteins.

As used herein, “amelioration” refers to an improvement in a disease orcondition or at least a partial relief of symptoms associated with adisease or condition.

As used herein, “cell response” refers to any cellular response thatresults from ion movement into or out of a cell or within a cell. Thecell response may be associated with any cellular activity that isdependent, at least in part, on ions such as, for example, calcium. Suchactivities may include, for example, cellular activation, geneexpression, endocytosis, exocytosis, cellular trafficking and apoptoticcell death.

As used herein, “immune cells” include cells of the immune system andcells that perform a function or activity in an immune response, suchas, but not limited to, T-cells, B-cells, lymphocytes, macrophages,dendritic cells, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, mast cells, plasmacells, white blood cells, antigen presenting cells and natural killercells.

As used herein, “cytokine” refers to small soluble proteins secreted bycells that can alter the behavior or properties of the secreting cell oranother cell. Cytokines bind to cytokine receptors and trigger abehavior or property within the cell, for example, cell proliferation,death or differentiation. Exemplary cytokines include, but are notlimited to, interleukins (e.g., IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7,IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17, IL-18,IL-1α, IL-1β and IL-1 RA), granulocyte colony stimulating factor(G-CSF), granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF),oncostatin M, erythropoietin, leukemia inhibitory factor (LIF),interferons, B7.1 (also known as CD80), B7.2 (also known as B70, CD86),TNF family members (TNF-α, TNF-β, LT-β, CD40 ligand, Fas ligand, CD27ligand, CD30 ligand, 4-1BBL, Trail), and MIF.

“Store operated calcium entry” or “SOCE” refers to the mechanism bywhich release of calcium ions from intracellular stores is coordinatedwith ion influx across the plasma membrane.

“Selective inhibitor of SOC channel activity” means that the inhibitoris selective for SOC channels and does not substantially affect theactivity of other types of ion channels.

“Selective inhibitor of CRAC channel activity” means that the inhibitoris selective for CRAC channels and does not substantially affect theactivity of other types of ion channels and/or other SOC channels.

Monitoring or Assessing Effects on Intracellular Calcium

In monitoring or assessing the effect of a compound of Formulas (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) on intracellular calcium in any of thescreening/identification methods described herein or recognized in thefield, a direct or indirect evaluation or measurement of cellular(including cytosolic and intracellular organelle or compartment) calciumand/or movement of ions into, within or out of a cell, organelle,calcium store or portions thereof (e.g., a membrane) can be conducted. Avariety of methods are described herein and/or recognized in the fieldfor evaluating calcium levels and ion movements or flux. The particularmethod used and the conditions employed can depend on whether aparticular aspect of intracellular calcium is being monitored orassessed. For example, as described herein in some embodiments, reagentsand conditions are used, for specifically evaluating store-operatedcalcium entry, resting cytosolic calcium levels, calcium buffering andcalcium levels and uptake by or release from intracellular organellesand calcium stores. The effect of a compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) on intracellular calcium can be monitored or assessedusing, for example, a cell, an intracellular organelle or calciumstorage compartment, a membrane (including, e.g., a detached membranepatch or a lipid bilayer) or a cell-free assay system (e.g., outside-outmembrane vesicle). Generally, some aspect of intracellular calcium ismonitored or assessed in the presence of test agent and compared to acontrol, e.g., intracellular calcium in the absence of test agent.

Methods of Modulating Intracellular Calcium

Modulation of intracellular calcium can be any alteration or adjustmentin intracellular calcium including but not limited to alteration ofcalcium concentration or level in the cytoplasm and/or intracellularcalcium storage organelles, e.g., endoplasmic reticulum, alteration inthe movement of calcium into, out of and within a cell or intracellularcalcium store or organelle, alteration in the location of calcium withina cell, and alteration of the kinetics, or other properties, of calciumfluxes into, out of and within cells. In particular embodiments,intracellular calcium modulation can involve alteration or adjustment,e.g. reduction or inhibition, of store-operated calcium entry, cytosoliccalcium buffering, calcium levels in or movement of calcium into, out ofor within an intracellular calcium store or organelle, and/or basal orresting cytosolic calcium levels. In some embodiments, modulation ofintracellular calcium can involve an alteration or adjustment inreceptor-mediated ion (e.g., calcium) movement, secondmessenger-operated ion (e.g., calcium) movement, calcium influx into orefflux out of a cell, and/or ion (e.g., calcium) uptake into or releasefrom intracellular compartments, including, for example, endosomes andlysosomes.

In one aspect, compounds described herein modulate intracellularcalcium, such as but not limited to, modulation (e.g. reduction orinhibition) of SOC channel activity, such as inhibition of CRAC channelactivity (e g inhibition of I_(CRAC), inhibition of SOCE) in an immunesystem cell (e.g., a lymphocyte, white blood cell, T cell, B cell), afibroblast (or a cell derived from a fibroblast), or an epidermal,dermal or skin cell (e.g., a keratinocyte). The step of modulating oneor more proteins involved in modulating intracellular calcium (e.g. aSTIM protein and/or Orai protein) can involve, for example, reducing thelevel, expression of, an activity of, function of and/or molecularinteractions of a protein. For instance, if a cell exhibits an increasein calcium levels or lack of regulation of an aspect of intracellularcalcium modulation, e.g., store-operated calcium entry, then modulatingmay involve reducing the level of, expression of, an activity orfunction of, or a molecular interaction of a protein, e.g. a STIMprotein and/or Orai protein.

Treatment Methods

In one embodiment is a method of modulating store-operated calciumchannel activity comprising contacting the store-operated calcium (SOC)channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof, wherein the contacting occurs in vitro.

In another embodiment is a method of modulating store-operated calciumchannel activity comprising contacting the store-operated calcium (SOC)channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof, wherein the contacting occurs in vivo.

In yet another embodiment is a method of modulating store-operatedcalcium channel activity comprising contacting the store-operatedcalcium (SOC) channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound ofFormula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceuticallyacceptable prodrug thereof, wherein the compound of Formula (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) modulates an activity of, modulates an interactionof, or modulates the level of, or distributions of, or binds to, orinteracts with at least one portion of the store operated calciumchannel complex selected from stromal interaction molecules (STIM)family of proteins.

In a further embodiment is a method of modulating store-operated calciumchannel activity comprising contacting the store-operated calcium (SOC)channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof, wherein the compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV)or (V) modulates an activity of, modulates an interaction of, ormodulates the level of, or distributions of, or binds to, or interactswith at least one portion of STIM1 or STIM2.

In another embodiment is a method of modulating store-operated calciumchannel activity comprising contacting the store-operated calcium (SOC)channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof, wherein modulating store operated calcium channelactivity with a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)inhibits store-operated calcium entry (SOCE).

In yet another embodiment is a method of modulating store-operatedcalcium channel activity comprising contacting the store-operatedcalcium (SOC) channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound ofFormula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceuticallyacceptable prodrug thereof, wherein the store operated calcium channelcomplex is calcium-release activated calcium (CRAC) channel complex.

In a further embodiment is a method of modulating store-operated calciumchannel activity comprising contacting the store-operated calcium (SOC)channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compound of Formula (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof, wherein modulating calcium release activated calcium(CRAC) activity with a compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)inhibits the electrophysiological current (I_(CRAC)) directly associatedwith activated CRAC channels.

In yet another embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein modulatingcalcium release activated calcium (CRAC) channel activity with acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) inhibitsstore-operated calcium entry (SOCE).

In a further embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein modulatingcalcium release activated calcium (CRAC) channel activity with acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) inhibits theelectrophysiological current (I_(CRAC)) directly associated withactivated CRAC channels.

In yet a further embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) inhibits SOCE with an IC₅₀ below10 μM.

In another embodiment is a method of modulating calcium releaseactivated calcium channel (CRAC) activity in a mammal comprisingadministering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) inhibits electrophysiologicalcurrent (I_(CRAC)) directly associated with activated CRAC channels at aconcentration below 10 μM.

In one aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder or conditionin a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of store operated calciumchannel activity comprising administering to the mammal a compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceuticallyacceptable prodrug thereof

In one embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulates the activity of,modulates an interaction of, or binds to, or interacts with a mammalianSTIM1 protein, or a mammalian STIM2 protein.

In one aspect is a method for treating an autoimmune disease,heteroimmune disease or condition, or inflammatory disease in a mammalcomprising administering to the mammal a compound of Formula (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof

In one embodiment, the autoimmune disease is inflammatory bowel disease,rheumatoid arthritis, myasthenia gravis, multiple sclerosis, Sjogren'ssyndrome, type I diabetes, lupus erythematosus, psoriasis,osteoarthritis, scleroderma, and autoimmune hemolytic anemia.

In another embodiment, the heteroimmune disease or condition isgraft-versus-host disease, graft rejection, atopic dermatitis, allergicconjunctivitis, organ transplant rejection, allogeneic or xenogenictransplantation, and allergic rhinitis.

In a further embodiment, the inflammatory disease is uveitis,vasculitis, vaginitis, asthma, inflammatory muscle disease, dermatitis,interstitial cystitis, dermatomyositis, hepatitis, and chronic relapsinghepatitis.

In another aspect is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof

In one embodiment, the disease, disorder or condition in the mammal isselected from glomerulonephritis, hepatic diseases or disorders, renaldiseases or disorders, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease,osteoporosis, eczema, pulmonary fibrosis, thyroiditis, cystic fibrosis,and primary biliary cirrhosis.

In yet another embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formula (I), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof wherein the disease, disorder or condition is rheumatoidarthritis.

In a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is psoriasis.

In one embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is an inflammatory bowel disease.

In a further embodiment the inflammatory bowel disease is ulcerativecolitis.

In a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is organ transplant rejection.

In a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof wherein the disease,disorder or condition is multiple sclerosis.

In yet a further embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorderor condition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof further comprisingadministering to the mammal a second therapeutic agent.

In another embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, wherein the secondtherapeutic agent is selected from immunosuppressants, glucocorticoids,non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, Cox-2-specific inhibitors,leflunomide, gold thioglucose, gold thiomalate, aurofin, sulfasalazine,hydroxychloroquinine, minocycline, anti-TNF-α agents, abatacept,anakinra, interferon-β, interferon-γ, interleukin-2, allergy vaccines,antihistamines, antileukotrienes, beta-agonists, theophylline, andanticholinergics.

In yet another embodiment is a method of treating a disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), or apharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate,or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof, wherein the secondtherapeutic agent is selected from tacrolimus, cyclosporin, rapamicin,methotrexate, cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, mercaptopurine,mycophenolate, or FTY720, prednisone, cortisone acetate, prednisolone,methylprednisolone, dexamethasone, betamethasone, triamcinolone,beclometasone, fludrocortisone acetate, deoxycorticosterone acetate,aldosterone, aspirin, salicylic acid, gentisic acid, choline magnesiumsalicylate, choline salicylate, choline magnesium salicylate, cholinesalicylate, magnesium salicylate, sodium salicylate, diflunisal,carprofen, fenoprofen, fenoprofen calcium, fluorobiprofen, ibuprofen,ketoprofen, nabutone, ketolorac, ketorolac tromethamine, naproxen,oxaprozin, diclofenac, etodolac, indomethacin, sulindac, tolmetin,meclofenamate, meclofenamate sodium, mefenamic acid, piroxicam,meloxicam, celecoxib, rofecoxib, valdecoxib, parecoxib, etoricoxib,lumiracoxib, CS-502, JTE-522, L-745,337 and NS398, leflunomide, goldthioglucose, gold thiomalate, aurofin, sulfasalazine,hydroxychloroquinine, minocycline, infliximab, etanercept, adalimumab,abatacept, anakinra, interferon-β, interferon-γ, interleukin-2, allergyvaccines, antihistamines, antileukotrienes, beta-agonists, theophylline,and anticholinergics.

Also described herein is a method of inhibiting store-operated calciumentry (SOCE) activation of nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT) ina mammal comprising administering a compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptableprodrug thereof

In one embodiment is a method of inhibiting store-operated calcium entry(SOCE) activation of nuclear factor of activated T cells (NFAT) in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof,wherein the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulatesan interaction of, or modulates the level of, or distributions of, orbinds to, or interacts with a mammalian STIM1 protein, or a mammalianSTIM2 protein.

In another aspect is a method of decreasing cytokine release byinhibiting the store-operated calcium entry activation of NFAT in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof

In another embodiment is a method of decreasing cytokine release byinhibiting the store-operated calcium entry activation of NFAT in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereofwherein the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) modulatesan interaction of, or modulates the level of, or distributions of, orbinds to, or interacts with a mammalian STIM1 protein or a mammalianSTIM2 protein.

In yet another embodiment is a method of decreasing cytokine release byinhibiting the store-operated calcium entry activation of NFAT in amammal comprising administering a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V), or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereofwherein the cytokine is selected from IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6,IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-10, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15, IL-16, IL-17,IL-18, IL-1α, IL-1β, IL-1 RA, granulocyte colony stimulating factor(G-CSF), granulocyte-macrophage colony stimulating factor (GM-CSF),oncostatin M, erythropoietin, leukemia inhibitory factor (LIF),interferons, gamma-interferon (γ-IFN), B7.1 (CD80), B7.2 (B70, CD86),TNF-α, TNF-β, LT-β, CD40 ligand, Fas ligand, CD27 ligand, CD30 ligand,4-1BBL, Trail, and migration inhibitory factor (MIF).

In one aspect, provided herein is a pharmaceutical composition, whichincludes an effective amount of a compound provided herein, and apharmaceutically acceptable excipient. In a further aspect, provided arecompositions further including a second pharmaceutically activeingredient.

In certain embodiments, provided herein is a pharmaceutical compositioncontaining: i) a physiologically acceptable carrier, diluent, and/orexcipient; and ii) one or more compounds described herein.

In any of the aforementioned aspects are further embodiments thatinclude single administrations of the effective amount of the compoundsdisclosed herein, including further embodiments in which: (i) thecompound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is administered once;(ii) the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) isadministered to the mammal multiple times over the span of one day;(iii) continually; or (iv) continuously.

In any of the aforementioned aspects are further embodiments thatinclude multiple administrations of the effective amount of the compoundof Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), including further embodimentsin which (i) the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) isadministered in a single dose; (ii) the time between multipleadministrations is every 6 hours; (iii) the compound of Formulas (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) is administered to the mammal every 8 hours. Infurther or alternative embodiments, the method comprises a drug holiday,wherein the administration of the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) is temporarily suspended or the dose of the compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) being administered is temporarilyreduced; at the end of the drug holiday, dosing of the compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is resumed. The length of thedrug holiday can vary from 2 days to 1 year.

In one aspect, compounds described herein are administered to a human.In some embodiments, compounds described herein are orally administered.

Examples of Pharmaceutical Compositions and Methods of Administration

Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated in a conventional mannerusing one or more physiologically acceptable carriers includingexcipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the activecompounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Properformulation is dependent upon the route of administration chosen.Additional details about suitable excipients for pharmaceuticalcompositions described herein may be found, for example, in Remington:The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Nineteenth Ed (Easton, Pa.: MackPublishing Company, 1995); Hoover, John E., Remington's PharmaceuticalSciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa. 1975; Liberman, H. A. andLachman, L., Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York,N.Y., 1980; and Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems,Seventh Ed. (Lippincott Williams & Wilkins 1999), herein incorporated byreference for such disclosure.

A pharmaceutical composition, as used herein, refers to a mixture of acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein,with other chemical components, such as carriers, stabilizers, diluents,dispersing agents, suspending agents, thickening agents, and/orexcipients. The pharmaceutical composition facilitates administration ofthe compound to an organism. In practicing the methods of treatment oruse provided herein, therapeutically effective amounts of compoundsdescribed herein are administered in a pharmaceutical composition to amammal having a disease, disorder, or condition to be treated. In someembodiments, the mammal is a human. A therapeutically effective amountcan vary widely depending on the severity of the disease, the age andrelative health of the subject, the potency of the compound used andother factors. The compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)can be used singly or in combination with one or more therapeutic agentsas components of mixtures (as in combination therapy).

The pharmaceutical formulations described herein can be administered toa subject by multiple administration routes, including but not limitedto, oral, parenteral (e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular),intranasal, buccal, topical, rectal, or transdermal administrationroutes. Moreover, the pharmaceutical compositions described herein,which include a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)described herein, can be formulated into any suitable dosage form,including but not limited to, aqueous oral dispersions, liquids, gels,syrups, elixirs, slurries, suspensions, aerosols, controlled releaseformulations, fast melt formulations, effervescent formulations,lyophilized formulations, tablets, powders, pills, dragees, capsules,delayed release formulations, extended release formulations, pulsatilerelease formulations, multiparticulate formulations, and mixed immediaterelease and controlled release formulations.

One may administer the compounds and/or compositions in a local ratherthan systemic manner, for example, via injection of the compounddirectly into an organ or tissue, often in a depot preparation orsustained release formulation. Such long acting formulations may beadministered by implantation (for example subcutaneously orintramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Furthermore, one mayadminister the drug in a targeted drug delivery system, for example, ina liposome coated with organ-specific antibody. The liposomes will betargeted to and taken up selectively by the organ. In addition, the drugmay be provided in the form of a rapid release formulation, in the formof an extended release formulation, or in the form of an intermediaterelease formulation.

Pharmaceutical compositions including a compound described herein may bemanufactured in a conventional manner, such as, by way of example only,by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making,levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping or compressionprocesses.

The pharmaceutical compositions will include at least one compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein, as an activeingredient in free-acid or free-base form, or in a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt form. In addition, the methods and pharmaceuticalcompositions described herein include the use of crystalline forms (alsoknown as polymorphs), as well as active metabolites of these compoundshaving the same type of activity. In some situations, compounds mayexist as tautomers. All tautomers are included within the scope of thecompounds presented herein. Additionally, the compounds described hereincan exist in unsolvated as well as solvated forms with pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvents such as water, ethanol, and the like. The solvatedforms of the compounds presented herein are also considered to bedisclosed herein.

In certain embodiments, compositions provided herein may also includeone or more preservatives to inhibit microbial activity. Suitablepreservatives include quaternary ammonium compounds such as benzalkoniumchloride, cetyltrimethylammonium bromide and cetylpyridinium chloride.

Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained by mixing oneor more solid excipient with one or more of the compounds describedherein (e.g. compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)),optionally grinding the resulting mixture, and processing the mixture ofgranules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtaintablets, pills, or capsules. Suitable excipients include, for example,fillers such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, orsorbitol; cellulose preparations such as, for example, maize starch,wheat starch, rice starch, potato starch, gelatin, gum tragacanth,methylcellulose, microcrystalline cellulose,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose; or otherssuch as: polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP or povidone) or calcium phosphate. Ifdesired, disintegrating agents may be added, such as the cross-linkedcroscarmellose sodium, polyvinylpyrrolidone, agar, or alginic acid or asalt thereof such as sodium alginate.

Dragee cores are provided with suitable coatings. For this purpose,concentrated sugar solutions may be used, which may optionally containgum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethyleneglycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organicsolvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments may be added to thetablets or dragee coatings for identification or to characterizedifferent combinations of active compound doses.

Pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fitcapsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made ofgelatin and a plasticizer, such as glycerol or sorbitol. The push-fitcapsules can contain the active ingredients in admixture with fillersuch as lactose, binders such as starches, and/or lubricants such astalc or magnesium stearate and, optionally, stabilizers. In softcapsules, the active compounds may be dissolved or suspended in suitableliquids, such as fatty oils, liquid paraffin, or liquid polyethyleneglycols. In addition, stabilizers may be added.

In some embodiments, the solid dosage forms disclosed herein may be inthe form of a tablet, (including a suspension tablet, a fast-melttablet, a bite-disintegration tablet, a rapid-disintegration tablet, aneffervescent tablet, or a caplet), a pill, a powder (including a sterilepackaged powder, a dispensable powder, or an effervescent powder), acapsule (including both soft or hard capsules, e.g., capsules made fromanimal-derived gelatin or plant-derived HPMC, or “sprinkle capsules”),solid dispersion, solid solution, bioerodible dosage form, controlledrelease formulations, pulsatile release dosage forms, multiparticulatedosage forms, pellets, granules, or an aerosol. In other embodiments,the pharmaceutical formulation is in the form of a powder. In stillother embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulation is in the form of atablet, including but not limited to, a fast-melt tablet. Additionally,pharmaceutical formulations of the compounds described herein may beadministered as a single capsule or in multiple capsule dosage form. Insome embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulation is administered in two,or three, or four, capsules or tablets.

In some embodiments, solid dosage forms, e.g., tablets, effervescenttablets, and capsules, are prepared by mixing particles of a compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein, with one ormore pharmaceutical excipients to form a bulk blend composition. Whenreferring to these bulk blend compositions as homogeneous, it is meantthat the particles of the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or(V) described herein, are dispersed evenly throughout the composition sothat the composition may be subdivided into equally effective unitdosage forms, such as tablets, pills, and capsules. The individual unitdosages may also include film coatings, which disintegrate upon oralingestion or upon contact with diluent. These formulations can bemanufactured by conventional pharmacological techniques.

The pharmaceutical solid dosage forms described herein can include acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein, andone or more pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as a compatiblecarrier, binder, filling agent, suspending agent, flavoring agent,sweetening agent, disintegrating agent, dispersing agent, surfactant,lubricant, colorant, diluent, solubilizer, moistening agent,plasticizer, stabilizer, penetration enhancer, wetting agent,anti-foaming agent, antioxidant, preservative, or one or morecombination thereof. In still other aspects, using standard coatingprocedures, such as those described in Remington's PharmaceuticalSciences, 20th Edition (2000), a film coating is provided around theformulation of the compound described herein. In one embodiment, some orall of the particles of the compound described herein are coated. Inanother embodiment, some or all of the particles of the compounddescribed herein are microencapsulated. In still another embodiment, theparticles of the compound described herein are not microencapsulated andare uncoated.

Suitable carriers for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, but are not limited to, acacia, gelatin, colloidal silicondioxide, calcium glycerophosphate, calcium lactate, maltodextrin,glycerine, magnesium silicate, sodium caseinate, soy lecithin, sodiumchloride, tricalcium phosphate, dipotassium phosphate, sodium stearoyllactylate, carrageenan, monoglyceride, diglyceride, pregelatinizedstarch, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcelluloseacetate stearate, sucrose, microcrystalline cellulose, lactose, mannitoland the like.

Suitable filling agents for use in the solid dosage forms describedherein include, but are not limited to, lactose, calcium carbonate,calcium phosphate, dibasic calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate,microcrystalline cellulose, cellulose powder, dextrose, dextrates,dextran, starches, pregelatinized starch, hydroxypropylmethycellulose(HPMC), hydroxypropylmethycellulose phthalate,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate (HPMCAS), sucrose,xylitol, lactitol, mannitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride, polyethyleneglycol, and the like.

In order to release the compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or(V) from a solid dosage form matrix as efficiently as possible,disintegrants are often used in the formulation, especially when thedosage forms are compressed with binder. Disintegrants help rupturingthe dosage form matrix by swelling or capillary action when moisture isabsorbed into the dosage form. Suitable disintegrants for use in thesolid dosage forms described herein include, but are not limited to,natural starch such as corn starch or potato starch, a pregelatinizedstarch such as National 1551 or Amijel®, or sodium starch glycolate suchas Promogel® or Explotab®, a cellulose such as a wood product,methylcrystalline cellulose, e.g., Avicel®, Avicel® PH101, Avicel®PH102, Avicel® PH105, Elcema® P100, Emcocel®, Vivacel®, Ming Tia®, andSolka-Floc®, methylcellulose, croscarmellose, or a cross-linkedcellulose, such as cross-linked sodium carboxymethylcellulose(Ac-Di-Sol®), cross-linked carboxymethylcellulose, or cross-linkedcroscarmellose, a cross-linked starch such as sodium starch glycolate, across-linked polymer such as crospovidone, a cross-linkedpolyvinylpyrrolidone, alginate such as alginic acid or a salt of alginicacid such as sodium alginate, a clay such as Veegum® HV (magnesiumaluminum silicate), a gum such as agar, guar, locust bean, Karaya,pectin, or tragacanth, sodium starch glycolate, bentonite, a naturalsponge, a surfactant, a resin such as a cation-exchange resin, citruspulp, sodium lauryl sulfate, sodium lauryl sulfate in combinationstarch, and the like.

Binders impart cohesiveness to solid oral dosage form formulations: forpowder filled capsule formulation, they aid in plug formation that canbe filled into soft or hard shell capsules and for tablet formulation,they ensure the tablet remaining intact after compression and helpassure blend uniformity prior to a compression or fill step. Materialssuitable for use as binders in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, but are not limited to, carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose(e.g., Methocel®), hydroxypropylmethylcellulose (e.g. Hypromellose USPPharmacoat-603, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate (AqoateHS-LF and HS), hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose (e.g.,Klucel®), ethylcellulose (e.g., Ethocel®), and microcrystallinecellulose (e.g., Avicel®), microcrystalline dextrose, amylose, magnesiumaluminum silicate, polysaccharide acids, bentonites, gelatin,polyvinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer, crospovidone, povidone,starch, pregelatinized starch, tragacanth, dextrin, a sugar, such assucrose (e.g., Dipac®), glucose, dextrose, molasses, mannitol, sorbitol,xylitol (e.g., Xylitab®), lactose, a natural or synthetic gum such asacacia, tragacanth, ghatti gum, mucilage of isapol husks, starch,polyvinylpyrrolidone (e.g., Povidone® CL, Kollidon® CL, Polyplasdone®XL-10, and Povidone® K-12), larch arabogalactan, Veegum®, polyethyleneglycol, waxes, sodium alginate, and the like.

In general, binder levels of 20-70% are used in powder-filled gelatincapsule formulations. Binder usage level in tablet formulations varieswhether direct compression, wet granulation, roller compaction, or usageof other excipients such as fillers which itself can act as moderatebinder. In some embodiments, formulators determine the binder level forthe formulations, but binder usage level of up to 70% in tabletformulations is common.

Suitable lubricants or glidants for use in the solid dosage formsdescribed herein include, but are not limited to, stearic acid, calciumhydroxide, talc, corn starch, sodium stearyl fumerate, alkali-metal andalkaline earth metal salts, such as aluminum, calcium, magnesium, zinc,stearic acid, sodium stearates, magnesium stearate, zinc stearate,waxes, Stearowet®, boric acid, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodiumchloride, leucine, a polyethylene glycol or a methoxypolyethylene glycolsuch as Carbowax™, PEG 4000, PEG 5000, PEG 6000, propylene glycol,sodium oleate, glyceryl behenate, glyceryl palmitostearate, glycerylbenzoate, magnesium or sodium lauryl sulfate, and the like.

Suitable diluents for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, but are not limited to, sugars (including lactose, sucrose, anddextrose), polysaccharides (including dextrates and maltodextrin),polyols (including mannitol, xylitol, and sorbitol), cyclodextrins andthe like.

Suitable wetting agents for use in the solid dosage forms describedherein include, for example, oleic acid, glyceryl monostearate, sorbitanmonooleate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine oleate,polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polyoxyethylene sorbitanmonolaurate, quaternary ammonium compounds (e.g., Polyquat 10®), sodiumoleate, sodium lauryl sulfate, magnesium stearate, sodium docusate,triacetin, vitamin E TPGS and the like.

Suitable surfactants for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, for example, sodium lauryl sulfate, sorbitan monooleate,polyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate, polysorbates, polaxomers, bilesalts, glyceryl monostearate, copolymers of ethylene oxide and propyleneoxide, e.g., Pluronic® (BASF), and the like.

Suitable suspending agents for use in the solid dosage forms describedhere include, but are not limited to, polyvinylpyrrolidone, e.g.,polyvinylpyrrolidone K12, polyvinylpyrrolidone K17, polyvinylpyrrolidoneK25, or polyvinylpyrrolidone K30, polyethylene glycol, e.g., thepolyethylene glycol can have a molecular weight of about 300 to about6000, or about 3350 to about 4000, or about 5400 to about 7000, vinylpyrrolidone/vinyl acetate copolymer (S630), sodiumcarboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose,polysorbate-80, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium alginate, gums, such as,e.g., gum tragacanth and gum acacia, guar gum, xanthans, includingxanthan gum, sugars, cellulosics, such as, e.g., sodiumcarboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, polysorbate-80,sodium alginate, polyethoxylated sorbitan monolaurate, polyethoxylatedsorbitan monolaurate, povidone and the like.

Suitable antioxidants for use in the solid dosage forms described hereininclude, for example, e.g., butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), sodiumascorbate, and tocopherol.

There is considerable overlap between additives used in the solid dosageforms described herein. Thus, the above-listed additives should be takenas merely exemplary, and not limiting, of the types of additives thatcan be included in solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein.

In other embodiments, one or more layers of the pharmaceuticalformulation are plasticized. Illustratively, a plasticizer is generallya high boiling point solid or liquid. Suitable plasticizers can be addedfrom about 0.01% to about 50% by weight (w/w) of the coatingcomposition. Plasticizers include, but are not limited to, diethylphthalate, citrate esters, polyethylene glycol, glycerol, acetylatedglycerides, triacetin, polypropylene glycol, polyethylene glycol,triethyl citrate, dibutyl sebacate, stearic acid, stearol, stearate, andcastor oil.

Compressed tablets are solid dosage forms prepared by compacting thebulk blend of the formulations described above. In various embodiments,compressed tablets which are designed to dissolve in the mouth willinclude one or more flavoring agents. In other embodiments, thecompressed tablets will include a film surrounding the final compressedtablet. In some embodiments, the film coating can provide a delayedrelease of the compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)described herein from the formulation. In other embodiments, the filmcoating aids in patient compliance (e.g., Opadry® coatings or sugarcoating). Film coatings including Opadry® typically range from about 1%to about 3% of the tablet weight. In other embodiments, the compressedtablets include one or more excipients.

A capsule may be prepared, for example, by placing the bulk blend of theformulation of the compound described above, inside of a capsule. Insome embodiments, the formulations (non-aqueous suspensions andsolutions) are placed in a soft gelatin capsule. In other embodiments,the formulations are placed in standard gelatin capsules or non-gelatincapsules such as capsules comprising HPMC. In other embodiments, theformulation is placed in a sprinkle capsule, wherein the capsule may beswallowed whole or the capsule may be opened and the contents sprinkledon food prior to eating. In some embodiments, the therapeutic dose issplit into multiple (e.g., two, three, or four) capsules. In someembodiments, the entire dose of the formulation is delivered in acapsule form.

In various embodiments, the particles of the compound of Formulas (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein and one or more excipients aredry blended and compressed into a mass, such as a tablet, having ahardness sufficient to provide a pharmaceutical composition thatsubstantially disintegrates within less than about 30 minutes, less thanabout 35 minutes, less than about 40 minutes, less than about 45minutes, less than about 50 minutes, less than about 55 minutes, or lessthan about 60 minutes, after oral administration, thereby releasing theformulation into the gastrointestinal fluid.

In another aspect, dosage forms may include microencapsulatedformulations. In some embodiments, one or more other compatiblematerials are present in the microencapsulation material. Exemplarymaterials include, but are not limited to, pH modifiers, erosionfacilitators, anti-foaming agents, antioxidants, flavoring agents, andcarrier materials such as binders, suspending agents, disintegrationagents, filling agents, surfactants, solubilizers, stabilizers,lubricants, wetting agents, and diluents.

Materials useful for the microencapsulation described herein includematerials compatible with compounds described herein, which sufficientlyisolate the compound from other non-compatible excipients. Materialscompatible with compounds described herein are those that delay therelease of the compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) invivo.

Exemplary microencapsulation materials useful for delaying the releaseof the formulations including compounds described herein, include, butare not limited to, hydroxypropyl cellulose ethers (HPC) such as Klucel®or Nisso HPC, low-substituted hydroxypropyl cellulose ethers (L-HPC),hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose ethers (HPMC) such as Seppifilm-LC,Pharmacoat®, Metolose SR, Methocel®-E, Opadry YS, PrimaFlo, BenecelMP824, and Benecel MP843, methylcellulose polymers such as Methocel®-A,hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate stearate Aqoat (HF-LS, HF-LG,HF-MS) and Metolose®, Ethylcelluloses (EC) and mixtures thereof such asE461, Ethocel®, Aqualon®-EC, Surelease®, Polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) such asOpadry AMB, hydroxyethylcelluloses such as Natrosol®,carboxymethylcelluloses and salts of carboxymethylcelluloses (CMC) suchas Aqualon®-CMC, polyvinyl alcohol and polyethylene glycol co-polymerssuch as Kollicoat IR®, monoglycerides (Myverol), triglycerides (KLX),polyethylene glycols, modified food starch, acrylic polymers andmixtures of acrylic polymers with cellulose ethers such as Eudragit®EPO, Eudragit® L30D-55, Eudragit® FS 30D Eudragit® L100-55, Eudragit®L100, Eudragit® S100, Eudragit® RD100, Eudragit® E100, Eudragit® L12.5,Eudragit® S12.5, Eudragit® NE30D, and Eudragit® NE 40D, celluloseacetate phthalate, sepifilms such as mixtures of HPMC and stearic acid,cyclodextrins, and mixtures of these materials.

In still other embodiments, plasticizers such as polyethylene glycols,e.g., PEG 300, PEG 400, PEG 600, PEG 1450, PEG 3350, and PEG 800,stearic acid, propylene glycol, oleic acid, and triacetin areincorporated into the microencapsulation material. In other embodiments,the microencapsulating material useful for delaying the release of thepharmaceutical compositions is from the USP or the National Formulary(NF). In yet other embodiments, the microencapsulation material isKlucel. In still other embodiments, the microencapsulation material ismethocel.

Microencapsulated compounds described herein may be formulated bymethods that include, e.g., spray drying processes, spinningdisk-solvent processes, hot melt processes, spray chilling methods,fluidized bed, electrostatic deposition, centrifugal extrusion,rotational suspension separation, polymerization at liquid-gas orsolid-gas interface, pressure extrusion, or spraying solvent extractionbath. In addition to these, several chemical techniques, e.g., complexcoacervation, solvent evaporation, polymer-polymer incompatibility,interfacial polymerization in liquid media, in situ polymerization,in-liquid drying, and desolvation in liquid media could also be used.Furthermore, other methods such as roller compaction,extrusion/spheronization, coacervation, or nanoparticle coating may alsobe used.

In still other embodiments, effervescent powders are also prepared inaccordance with the present disclosure. Effervescent salts have beenused to disperse medicines in water for oral administration.Effervescent salts are granules or coarse powders containing a medicinalagent in a dry mixture, usually composed of sodium bicarbonate, citricacid and/or tartaric acid. When such salts are added to water, the acidsand the base react to liberate carbon dioxide gas, thereby causing“effervescence.” Examples of effervescent salts include, e.g., thefollowing ingredients: sodium bicarbonate or a mixture of sodiumbicarbonate and sodium carbonate, citric acid and/or tartaric acid. Anyacid-base combination that results in the liberation of carbon dioxidecan be used in place of the combination of sodium bicarbonate and citricand tartaric acids, as long as the ingredients were suitable forpharmaceutical use and result in a pH of about 6.0 or higher.

In other embodiments, the formulations described herein, which include acompound described herein, are solid dispersions. Methods of producingsuch solid dispersions include, but are not limited to, for example,U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,343,789, 5,340,591, 5,456,923, 5,700,485, 5,723,269,and U.S. patent publication no. 2004/0013734. In still otherembodiments, the formulations described herein are solid solutions.Solid solutions incorporate a substance together with the active agentand other excipients such that heating the mixture results indissolution of the drug and the resulting composition is then cooled toprovide a solid blend which can be further formulated or directly addedto a capsule or compressed into a tablet. Methods of producing suchsolid solutions include, but are not limited to, for example, U.S. Pat.Nos. 4,151,273, 5,281,420, and 6,083,518.

The pharmaceutical solid oral dosage forms including formulationsdescribed herein, which include compounds described herein, can befurther formulated to provide a controlled release of the compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V). Controlled release refers to therelease of the compounds described herein from a dosage form in which itis incorporated according to a desired profile over an extended periodof time. Controlled release profiles include, for example, sustainedrelease, prolonged release, pulsatile release, and delayed releaseprofiles. In contrast to immediate release compositions, controlledrelease compositions allow delivery of an agent to a subject over anextended period of time according to a predetermined profile. Suchrelease rates can provide therapeutically effective levels of agent foran extended period of time and thereby provide a longer period ofpharmacologic response while minimizing side effects as compared toconventional rapid release dosage forms. Such longer periods of responseprovide for many inherent benefits that are not achieved with thecorresponding short acting, immediate release preparations.

In some embodiments, the solid dosage forms described herein can beformulated as enteric coated delayed release oral dosage forms, i.e., asan oral dosage form of a pharmaceutical composition as described hereinwhich utilizes an enteric coating to affect release in the smallintestine of the gastrointestinal tract. The enteric coated dosage formmay be a compressed or molded or extruded tablet/mold (coated oruncoated) containing granules, powder, pellets, beads or particles ofthe active ingredient and/or other composition components, which arethemselves coated or uncoated. The enteric coated oral dosage form mayalso be a capsule (coated or uncoated) containing pellets, beads orgranules of the solid carrier or the composition, which are themselvescoated or uncoated.

The term “delayed release” as used herein refers to the delivery so thatthe release can be accomplished at some generally predictable locationin the intestinal tract more distal to that which would have beenaccomplished if there had been no delayed release alterations. In someembodiments the method for delay of release is coating. Any coatingsshould be applied to a sufficient thickness such that the entire coatingdoes not dissolve in the gastrointestinal fluids at pH below about 5,but does dissolve at pH about 5 and above. Coatings may be made from:

Acrylic polymers. The performance of acrylic polymers (primarily theirsolubility in biological fluids) can vary based on the degree and typeof substitution. Examples of suitable acrylic polymers includemethacrylic acid copolymers and ammonium methacrylate copolymers. TheEudragit series E, L, S, RL, RS and NE (Rohm Pharma) are available assolubilized in organic solvent, aqueous dispersion, or dry powders. TheEudragit series RL, NE, and RS are insoluble in the gastrointestinaltract but are permeable and are used primarily for colonic targeting.The Eudragit series E dissolve in the stomach. The Eudragit series L,L-30D and S are insoluble in stomach and dissolve in the intestine;

Cellulose Derivatives. Examples of suitable cellulose derivatives are:ethyl cellulose; reaction mixtures of partial acetate esters ofcellulose with phthalic anhydride. The performance can vary based on thedegree and type of substitution. Cellulose acetate phthalate (CAP)dissolves in pH>6. Aquateric (FMC) is an aqueous based system and is aspray dried CAP pseudolatex with particles <1 μm. Other components inAquateric can include pluronics, Tweens, and acetylated monoglycerides.Other suitable cellulose derivatives include: cellulose acetatetrimellitate (Eastman); methylcellulose (Pharmacoat, Methocel);hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose phthalate (HPMCP); hydroxypropylmethylcellulose succinate (HPMCS); and hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetatesuccinate (e.g., AQOAT (Shin Etsu)). The performance can vary based onthe degree and type of substitution. For example, HPMCP such as, HP-50,HP-55, HP-55S, HP-55F grades are suitable. The performance can varybased on the degree and type of substitution. For example, suitablegrades of hydroxypropylmethylcellulose acetate succinate include, butare not limited to, AS-LG (LF), which dissolves at pH 5, AS-MG (MF),which dissolves at pH 5.5, and AS-HG (HF), which dissolves at higher pH.These polymers are offered as granules, or as fine powders for aqueousdispersions;

Poly Vinyl Acetate Phthalate (PVAP). PVAP dissolves in pH>5, and it ismuch less permeable to water vapor and gastric fluids.

In some embodiments, the coating can, and usually does, contain aplasticizer and possibly other coating excipients such as colorants,talc, and/or magnesium stearate. Suitable plasticizers include triethylcitrate (Citroflex 2), triacetin (glyceryl triacetate), acetyl triethylcitrate (Citroflec A2), Carbowax 400 (polyethylene glycol 400), diethylphthalate, tributyl citrate, acetylated monoglycerides, glycerol, fattyacid esters, propylene glycol, and dibutyl phthalate. In particular,anionic carboxylic acrylic polymers usually will contain 10-25% byweight of a plasticizer, especially dibutyl phthalate, polyethyleneglycol, triethyl citrate and triacetin. Conventional coating techniquessuch as spray or pan coating are employed to apply coatings. The coatingthickness must be sufficient to ensure that the oral dosage form remainsintact until the desired site of topical delivery in the intestinaltract is reached.

Colorants, detackifiers, surfactants, antifoaming agents, lubricants(e.g., carnuba wax or PEG) may be added to the coatings besidesplasticizers to solubilize or disperse the coating material, and toimprove coating performance and the coated product.

In other embodiments, the formulations described herein, which include acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein, aredelivered using a pulsatile dosage form. A pulsatile dosage form iscapable of providing one or more immediate release pulses atpredetermined time points after a controlled lag time or at specificsites. Pulsatile dosage forms may be administered using a variety ofpulsatile formulations including, but are not limited to, thosedescribed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,011,692; 5,017,381; 5,229,135; 5,840,329;4,871,549; 5,260,068; 5,260,069; 5,508,040; 5,567,441 and 5,837,284.

Many other types of controlled release systems are suitable for use withthe formulations described herein. Examples of such delivery systemsinclude, e.g., polymer-based systems, such as polylactic andpolyglycolic acid, polyanhydrides and polycaprolactone; porous matrices,nonpolymer-based systems that are lipids, including sterols, such ascholesterol, cholesterol esters and fatty acids, or neutral fats, suchas mono-, di- and triglycerides; hydrogel release systems; silasticsystems; peptide-based systems; wax coatings, bioerodible dosage forms,compressed tablets using conventional binders and the like. See, e.g.,Liberman et al., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 2 Ed., Vol. 1, pp. 209-214(1990); Singh et al., Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, 2ndEd., pp. 751-753 (2002); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,327,725; 4,624,848; 4,968,509;5,461,140; 5,456,923; 5,516,527; 5,622,721; 5,686,105; 5,700,410;5,977,175; 6,465,014; and 6,932,983.

In some embodiments, pharmaceutical formulations are provided thatinclude particles of the compounds described herein, e.g. compounds ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), and at least one dispersingagent or suspending agent for oral administration to a subject. Theformulations may be a powder and/or granules for suspension, and uponadmixture with water, a substantially uniform suspension is obtained.

Liquid formulation dosage forms for oral administration can be aqueoussuspensions selected from the group including, but not limited to,pharmaceutically acceptable aqueous oral dispersions, emulsions,solutions, elixirs, gels, and syrups. See, e.g., Singh et al.,Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, 2nd Ed., pp. 754-757 (2002).

The aqueous suspensions and dispersions described herein can remain in ahomogenous state, as defined in The USP Pharmacists' Pharmacopeia (2005edition, chapter 905), for at least 4 hours. The homogeneity should bedetermined by a sampling method consistent with regard to determininghomogeneity of the entire composition. In one embodiment, an aqueoussuspension can be re-suspended into a homogenous suspension by physicalagitation lasting less than 1 minute. In another embodiment, an aqueoussuspension can be re-suspended into a homogenous suspension by physicalagitation lasting less than 45 seconds. In yet another embodiment, anaqueous suspension can be re-suspended into a homogenous suspension byphysical agitation lasting less than 30 seconds. In still anotherembodiment, no agitation is necessary to maintain a homogeneous aqueousdispersion.

The pharmaceutical compositions described herein may include sweeteningagents such as, but not limited to, acacia syrup, acesulfame K, alitame,anise, apple, aspartame, banana, Bavarian cream, berry, black currant,butterscotch, calcium citrate, camphor, caramel, cherry, cherry cream,chocolate, cinnamon, bubble gum, citrus, citrus punch, citrus cream,cotton candy, cocoa, cola, cool cherry, cool citrus, cyclamate,cylamate, dextrose, eucalyptus, eugenol, fructose, fruit punch, ginger,glycyrrhetinate, glycyrrhiza (licorice) syrup, grape, grapefruit, honey,isomalt, lemon, lime, lemon cream, monoammonium glyrrhizinate(MagnaSweet), maltol, mannitol, maple, marshmallow, menthol, mint cream,mixed berry, neohesperidine DC, neotame, orange, pear, peach,peppermint, peppermint cream, Prosweet® Powder, raspberry, root beer,rum, saccharin, safrole, sorbitol, spearmint, spearmint cream,strawberry, strawberry cream, stevia, sucralose, sucrose, sodiumsaccharin, saccharin, aspartame, acesulfame potassium, mannitol, talin,sucralose, sorbitol, swiss cream, tagatose, tangerine, thaumatin, tuttifruitti, vanilla, walnut, watermelon, wild cherry, wintergreen, xylitol,or any combination of these flavoring ingredients, e.g., anise-menthol,cherry-anise, cinnamon-orange, cherry-cinnamon, chocolate-mint,honey-lemon, lemon-lime, lemon-mint, menthol-eucalyptus, orange-cream,vanilla-mint, and mixtures thereof.

In some embodiments, the pharmaceutical formulations described hereincan be self-emulsifying drug delivery systems (SEDDS). Emulsions aredispersions of one immiscible phase in another, usually in the form ofdroplets. Generally, emulsions are created by vigorous mechanicaldispersion. SEDDS, as opposed to emulsions or microemulsions,spontaneously form emulsions when added to an excess of water withoutany external mechanical dispersion or agitation. An advantage of SEDDSis that only gentle mixing is required to distribute the dropletsthroughout the solution. Additionally, water or the aqueous phase can beadded just prior to administration, which ensures stability of anunstable or hydrophobic active ingredient. Thus, the SEDDS provides aneffective delivery system for oral and parenteral delivery ofhydrophobic active ingredients. SEDDS may provide improvements in thebioavailability of hydrophobic active ingredients. Methods of producingself-emulsifying dosage forms include, but are not limited to, forexample, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,858,401, 6,667,048, and 6,960,563.

There is overlap between the above-listed additives used in the aqueousdispersions or suspensions described herein, since a given additive isoften classified differently by different practitioners in the field, oris commonly used for any of several different functions. Thus, theabove-listed additives should be taken as merely exemplary, and notlimiting, of the types of additives that can be included in formulationsdescribed herein.

Potential excipients for intranasal formulations include, for example,U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,476,116, 5,116,817 and 6,391,452. Formulationssolutions in saline, employing benzyl alcohol or other suitablepreservatives, fluorocarbons, and/or other solubilizing or dispersingagents. See, for example, Ansel, H. C. et al., Pharmaceutical DosageForms and Drug Delivery Systems, Sixth Ed. (1995). Preferably thesecompositions and formulations are prepared with suitable nontoxicpharmaceutically acceptable ingredients. The choice of suitable carriersis highly dependent upon the exact nature of the nasal dosage formdesired, e.g., solutions, suspensions, ointments, or gels. Nasal dosageforms generally contain large amounts of water in addition to the activeingredient. Minor amounts of other ingredients such as pH adjusters,emulsifiers or dispersing agents, preservatives, surfactants, gellingagents, or buffering and other stabilizing and solubilizing agents mayalso be present. Preferably, the nasal dosage form should be isotonicwith nasal secretions.

For administration by inhalation, the compounds described herein may bein a form as an aerosol, a mist or a powder. Pharmaceutical compositionsdescribed herein are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosolspray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the useof a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane,trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide orother suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol, the dosageunit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount.Capsules and cartridges of, such as, by way of example only, gelatin foruse in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powdermix of the compound described herein and a suitable powder base such aslactose or starch.

Buccal formulations that include compounds described herein may beadministered using a variety of formulations which include, but are notlimited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,229,447, 4,596,795, 4,755,386, and5,739,136. In addition, the buccal dosage forms described herein canfurther include a bioerodible (hydrolysable) polymeric carrier that alsoserves to adhere the dosage form to the buccal mucosa. The buccal dosageform is fabricated so as to erode gradually over a predetermined timeperiod, wherein the delivery of the compound is provided essentiallythroughout. Buccal drug delivery avoids the disadvantages encounteredwith oral drug administration, e.g., slow absorption, degradation of theactive agent by fluids present in the gastrointestinal tract and/orfirst-pass inactivation in the liver. With regard to the bioerodible(hydrolysable) polymeric carrier, virtually any such carrier can beused, so long as the desired drug release profile is not compromised,and the carrier is compatible with the compounds described herein, andany other components that may be present in the buccal dosage unit.Generally, the polymeric carrier comprises hydrophilic (water-solubleand water-swellable) polymers that adhere to the wet surface of thebuccal mucosa. Examples of polymeric carriers useful herein includeacrylic acid polymers and co, e.g., those known as “carbomers”(Carbopol®, which may be obtained from B.F. Goodrich, is one suchpolymer). Other components may also be incorporated into the buccaldosage forms described herein include, but are not limited to,disintegrants, diluents, binders, lubricants, flavoring, colorants,preservatives, and the like. For buccal or sublingual administration,the compositions may take the form of tablets, lozenges, or gelsformulated in a conventional manner.

Transdermal formulations described herein may be administered using avariety of devices including but not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos.3,598,122, 3,598,123, 3,710,795, 3,731,683, 3,742,951, 3,814,097,3,921,636, 3,972,995, 3,993,072, 3,993,073, 3,996,934, 4,031,894,4,060,084, 4,069,307, 4,077,407, 4,201,211, 4,230,105, 4,292,299,4,292,303, 5,336,168, 5,665,378, 5,837,280, 5,869,090, 6,923,983,6,929,801 and 6,946,144.

The transdermal dosage forms described herein may incorporate certainpharmaceutically acceptable excipients which are conventional in theart. In one embodiment, the transdermal formulations described hereininclude at least three components: (1) a formulation of a compound of;(2) a penetration enhancer; and (3) an aqueous adjuvant. In addition,transdermal formulations can include additional components such as, butnot limited to, gelling agents, creams and ointment bases, and the like.In some embodiments, the transdermal formulation can further include awoven or non-woven backing material to enhance absorption and preventthe removal of the transdermal formulation from the skin. In otherembodiments, the transdermal formulations described herein can maintaina saturated or supersaturated state to promote diffusion into the skin.

Formulations suitable for transdermal administration of compoundsdescribed herein may employ transdermal delivery devices and transdermaldelivery patches and can be lipophilic emulsions or buffered, aqueoussolutions, dissolved and/or dispersed in a polymer or an adhesive. Suchpatches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demanddelivery of pharmaceutical agents. Still further, transdermal deliveryof the compounds described herein can be accomplished by means ofiontophoretic patches and the like. Additionally, transdermal patchescan provide controlled delivery of the compounds described herein. Therate of absorption can be slowed by using rate-controlling membranes orby trapping the compound within a polymer matrix or gel. Conversely,absorption enhancers can be used to increase absorption. An absorptionenhancer or carrier can include absorbable pharmaceutically acceptablesolvents to assist passage through the skin. For example, transdermaldevices are in the form of a bandage comprising a backing member, areservoir containing the compound optionally with carriers, optionally arate controlling barrier to deliver the compound to the skin of the hostat a controlled and predetermined rate over a prolonged period of time,and means to secure the device to the skin.

Formulations suitable for intramuscular, subcutaneous, or intravenousinjection may include physiologically acceptable sterile aqueous ornon-aqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, andsterile powders for reconstitution into sterile injectable solutions ordispersions. Examples of suitable aqueous and non-aqueous carriers,diluents, solvents, or vehicles including water, ethanol, polyols(propyleneglycol, polyethylene-glycol, glycerol, cremophor and thelike), suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils (such as olive oil) andinjectable organic esters such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can bemaintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, bythe maintenance of the required particle size in the case ofdispersions, and by the use of surfactants. Formulations suitable forsubcutaneous injection may also contain additives such as preserving,wetting, emulsifying, and dispensing agents. Prevention of the growth ofmicroorganisms can be ensured by various antibacterial and antifungalagents, such as parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, sorbic acid, and thelike. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such assugars, sodium chloride, and the like. Prolonged absorption of theinjectable pharmaceutical form can be brought about by the use of agentsdelaying absorption, such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

For intravenous injections, compounds described herein may be formulatedin aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible bufferssuch as Hank's solution, Ringer's solution, or physiological salinebuffer. For transmucosal administration, penetrants appropriate to thebarrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants aregenerally recognized in the field. For other parenteral injections,appropriate formulations may include aqueous or nonaqueous solutions,preferably with physiologically compatible buffers or excipients. Suchexcipients are generally recognized in the field.

Parenteral injections may involve bolus injection or continuousinfusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosageform, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an addedpreservative. The pharmaceutical composition described herein may be ina form suitable for parenteral injection as a sterile suspensions,solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may containformulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersingagents. Pharmaceutical formulations for parenteral administrationinclude aqueous solutions of the active compounds in water-soluble form.Additionally, suspensions of the active compounds may be prepared asappropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents orvehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acidesters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Aqueousinjection suspensions may contain substances which increase theviscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose,sorbitol, or dextran. Optionally, the suspension may also containsuitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of thecompounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form forconstitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water,before use.

In certain embodiments, delivery systems for pharmaceutical compoundsmay be employed, such as, for example, liposomes and emulsions. Incertain embodiments, compositions provided herein also include anmucoadhesive polymer, selected from among, for example,carboxymethylcellulose, carbomer (acrylic acid polymer),poly(methylmethacrylate), polyacrylamide, polycarbophil, acrylicacid/butyl acrylate copolymer, sodium alginate and dextran.

In some embodiments, the compounds described herein may be administeredtopically and are formulated into a variety of topically administrablecompositions, such as solutions, suspensions, lotions, gels, pastes,medicated sticks, balms, creams or ointments. Such pharmaceuticalcompounds can contain solubilizers, stabilizers, tonicity enhancingagents, buffers and preservatives.

The compounds described herein may also be formulated in rectalcompositions such as enemas, rectal gels, rectal foams, rectal aerosols,suppositories, jelly suppositories, or retention enemas, containingconventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides,as well as synthetic polymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone, PEG, and thelike. In suppository forms of the compositions, a low-melting wax suchas, but not limited to, a mixture of fatty acid glycerides, optionallyin combination with cocoa butter is first melted.

Generally, an agent, such as a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V), is administered in an amount effective for amelioration of,or prevention of the development of symptoms of, the disease or disorder(i.e., a therapeutically effective amount). Thus, a therapeuticallyeffective amount can be an amount that is capable of at least partiallypreventing or reversing a disease or disorder. The dose required toobtain an effective amount may vary depending on the agent, formulation,disease or disorder, and individual to whom the agent is administered.

Determination of effective amounts may also involve in vitro assays inwhich varying doses of agent are administered to cells in culture andthe concentration of agent effective for ameliorating some or allsymptoms is determined in order to calculate the concentration requiredin vivo. Effective amounts may also be based in in vivo animal studies.

An agent can be administered prior to, concurrently with and subsequentto the appearance of symptoms of a disease or disorder. In someembodiments, an agent is administered to a subject with a family historyof the disease or disorder, or who has a phenotype that may indicate apredisposition to a disease or disorder, or who has a genotype whichpredisposes the subject to the disease or disorder.

The particular delivery system used can depend on a number of factors,including, for example, the intended target and the route ofadministration, e.g., local or systemic. Targets for delivery can bespecific cells which are causing or contributing to a disease ordisorder, including, for example, cells that have altered intracellularcalcium or calcium dysregulation or dyshomeostasis, and cells that donot have altered intracellular calcium but that may have somealteration, defect or deficiency that can be, at least in part,compensated, counteracted, reversed or alleviated or eliminated byaltering intracellular calcium of the cell. Particular cells include,for example, immune cells (e.g., lymphocytes, T cells, B cells, whiteblood cells), fibroblasts (or cells derived from a fibroblast),epidermal, dermal or skin cells (e.g., a keratinocytes), blood cells,kidney or renal cells (e.g., mesangial cells), muscle cells (e.g., asmooth muscle cell such as an airway (tracheal or bronchial) smoothmuscle cell) and exocrine or secretory (e.g., salivary, includingparotid acinar and submandibular gland) cells. For example, a targetcell can be resident or infiltrating cells in the lungs or airways thatcontribute to an asthmatic illness or disease, resident or infiltratingcells in the nervous system contributing to a neurological,neurodegenerative or demyelinating disease or disorder, resident orinfiltrating cells involved in rejection of a kidney graft, graftedcells that when activated lead to graft-versus-host disease, resident orinfiltrating cells involved in rejection of a kidney graft, resident orinfiltrating cells, activation of which contributes to inflammation,e.g., in arthritis, resident or infiltrating cells in the kidney orrenal system (e.g., mesangial cells) involved in neuropathy andglomerulonephritis and resident or infiltrating cells in exocrine glands(e.g., salivary and lacrimal glands) involved in autoimmune disorders(e.g., Sjogren's disease). Administration of an agent can be directed toone or more cell types or subsets of a cell type by methods recognizedin the field. For example, an agent can be coupled to an antibody,ligand to a cell surface receptor or a toxin, or can be contained in aparticle that is selectively internalized into cells, e.g., liposomes ora virus in which the viral receptor binds specifically to a certain celltype, or a viral particle lacking the viral nucleic acid, or can beadministered locally.

Examples of Methods of Dosing and Treatment Regimens

The compounds described herein can be used in the preparation ofmedicaments for the modulation of intracellular calcium, or for thetreatment of diseases or conditions that would benefit, at least inpart, from modulation of intracellular calcium. In addition, a methodfor treating any of the diseases or conditions described herein in asubject in need of such treatment, involves administration ofpharmaceutical compositions containing at least one compound describedherein, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable prodrug, or pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof, intherapeutically effective amounts to said subject.

The compositions containing the compound(s) described herein can beadministered for prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatments. Intherapeutic applications, the compositions are administered to a patientalready suffering from a disease or condition, in an amount sufficientto cure or at least partially arrest the symptoms of the disease orcondition. Amounts effective for this use will depend on the severityand course of the disease or condition, previous therapy, the patient'shealth status, weight, and response to the drugs, and the judgment ofthe treating physician.

In prophylactic applications, compositions containing the compoundsdescribed herein are administered to a patient susceptible to orotherwise at risk of a particular disease, disorder or condition. Suchan amount is defined to be a “prophylactically effective amount ordose.” In this use, the precise amounts also depend on the patient'sstate of health, weight, and the like. When used in a patient, effectiveamounts for this use will depend on the severity and course of thedisease, disorder or condition, previous therapy, the patient's healthstatus and response to the drugs, and the judgment of the treatingphysician.

In the case wherein the patient's condition does not improve, upon thedoctor's discretion the administration of the compounds may beadministered chronically, that is, for an extended period of time,including throughout the duration of the patient's life in order toameliorate or otherwise control or limit the symptoms of the patient'sdisease or condition.

In the case wherein the patient's status does improve, upon the doctor'sdiscretion the administration of the compounds may be givencontinuously; alternatively, the dose of drug being administered may betemporarily reduced or temporarily suspended for a certain length oftime (i.e., a “drug holiday”). The length of the drug holiday can varybetween 2 days and 1 year, including by way of example only, 2 days, 3days, 4 days, 5 days, 6 days, 7 days, 10 days, 12 days, 15 days, 20days, 28 days, 35 days, 50 days, 70 days, 100 days, 120 days, 150 days,180 days, 200 days, 250 days, 280 days, 300 days, 320 days, 350 days, or365 days. The dose reduction during a drug holiday may be from about 10%to about 100%, including, by way of example only, about 10%, about 15%,about 20%, about 25%, about 30%, about 35%, about 40%, about 45%, about50%, about 55%, about 60%, about 65%, about 70%, about 75%, about 80%,about 85%, about 90%, about 95%, or about 100%.

Once improvement of the patient's conditions has occurred, a maintenancedose is administered if necessary. Subsequently, the dosage or thefrequency of administration, or both, can be reduced, as a function ofthe symptoms, to a level at which the improved disease, disorder orcondition is retained. Patients can, however, require intermittenttreatment on a long-term basis upon any recurrence of symptoms.

The amount of a given agent that will correspond to such an amount willvary depending upon factors such as the particular compound, disease orcondition and its severity, the identity (e.g., weight) of the subjector host in need of treatment, but can nevertheless be determined in amanner recognized in the field according to the particular circumstancessurrounding the case, including, e.g., the specific agent beingadministered, the route of administration, the condition being treated,and the subject or host being treated. In general, however, dosesemployed for adult human treatment will typically be in the range ofabout 0.02-about 5000 mg per day, in some embodiments, about 1-about1500 mg per day. The desired dose may conveniently be presented in asingle dose or as divided doses administered simultaneously (or over ashort period of time) or at appropriate intervals, for example as two,three, four or more sub-doses per day.

The pharmaceutical composition described herein may be in unit dosageforms suitable for single administration of precise dosages. In unitdosage form, the formulation is divided into unit doses containingappropriate quantities of one or more compound. The unit dosage may bein the form of a package containing discrete quantities of theformulation. Non-limiting examples are packaged tablets or capsules, andpowders in vials or ampoules. Aqueous suspension compositions can bepackaged in single-dose non-reclosable containers. Alternatively,multiple-dose reclosable containers can be used, in which case it istypical to include a preservative in the composition. By way of exampleonly, formulations for parenteral injection may be presented in unitdosage form, which include, but are not limited to ampoules, or inmulti-dose containers, with an added preservative.

The daily dosages appropriate for the compounds described hereindescribed herein are from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 20 mg/kg. In oneembodiment, the daily dosages are from about 0.1 mg/kg to about 10mg/kg. An indicated daily dosage in the larger mammal, including, butnot limited to, humans, is in the range from about 0.5 mg to about 1000mg, conveniently administered in a single dose or in divided doses,including, but not limited to, up to four times a day or in extendedrelease form. Suitable unit dosage forms for oral administration includefrom about 1 to about 500 mg active ingredient. In one embodiment, theunit dosage is about 1 mg, about 5 mg, about, 10 mg, about 20 mg, about50 mg, about 100 mg, about 200 mg, about 250 mg, about 400 mg, or about500 mg. The foregoing ranges are merely suggestive, as the number ofvariables in regard to an individual treatment regime is large, andconsiderable excursions from these recommended values are not uncommon.Such dosages may be altered depending on a number of variables, notlimited to the activity of the compound used, the disease or conditionto be treated, the mode of administration, the requirements of theindividual subject, the severity of the disease or condition beingtreated, and the judgment of the practitioner.

Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such therapeutic regimens can bedetermined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures orexperimental animals, including, but not limited to, the determinationof the LD₅₀ (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED₅₀ (thedose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratiobetween the toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index andit can be expressed as the ratio between LD₅₀ and ED₅₀. Compoundsexhibiting high therapeutic indices are preferred. The data obtainedfrom cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating arange of dosage for use in human. The dosage of such compounds liespreferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include theED₅₀ with minimal toxicity. The dosage may vary within this rangedepending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administrationutilized.

Combination Treatments

The compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), andcompositions thereof, may also be used in combination with othertherapeutic agents that are selected for their therapeutic value for thecondition to be treated. In general, the compositions described hereinand, in embodiments where combinational therapy is employed, otheragents do not have to be administered in the same pharmaceuticalcomposition, and may, because of different physical and chemicalcharacteristics, have to be administered by different routes. Thedetermination of the mode of administration and the advisability ofadministration, where possible, in the same pharmaceutical composition,is well within the knowledge of the clinician. The initialadministration can be made according to established protocols recognizedin the field, and then, based upon the observed effects, the dosage,modes of administration and times of administration can be modified bythe clinician.

In certain instances, it may be appropriate to administer at least onecompound described herein in combination with another therapeutic agent.By way of example only, if one of the side effects experienced by apatient upon receiving one of the compounds herein, such as a compoundof Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), is nausea, then it may beappropriate to administer an anti-nausea agent in combination with theinitial therapeutic agent. Or, by way of example only, the therapeuticeffectiveness of one of the compounds described herein may be enhancedby administration of an adjuvant (i.e., by itself the adjuvant may haveminimal therapeutic benefit, but in combination with another therapeuticagent, the overall therapeutic benefit to the patient is enhanced). Or,by way of example only, the benefit experienced by a patient may beincreased by administering one of the compounds described herein withanother therapeutic agent (which also includes a therapeutic regimen)that also has therapeutic benefit. In any case, regardless of thedisease, disorder or condition being treated, the overall benefitexperienced by the patient may simply be additive of the two therapeuticagents or the patient may experience a synergistic benefit.

The particular choice of compounds used will depend upon the diagnosisof the attending physicians and their judgment of the condition of thepatient and the appropriate treatment protocol. The compounds may beadministered concurrently (e.g., simultaneously, essentiallysimultaneously or within the same treatment protocol) or sequentially,depending upon the nature of the disease, disorder, or condition, thecondition of the patient, and the actual choice of compounds used. Thedetermination of the order of administration, and the number ofrepetitions of administration of each therapeutic agent during atreatment protocol, is well within the knowledge of the physician afterevaluation of the disease being treated and the condition of thepatient.

Therapeutically-effective dosages can vary when the drugs are used intreatment combinations. Methods for experimentally determiningtherapeutically-effective dosages of drugs and other agents for use incombination treatment regimens are described in the literature. Forexample, the use of metronomic dosing, i.e., providing more frequent,lower doses in order to minimize toxic side effects, has been describedextensively in the literature Combination treatment further includesperiodic treatments that start and stop at various times to assist withthe clinical management of the patient.

For combination therapies described herein, dosages of theco-administered compounds will of course vary depending on the type ofco-drug employed, on the specific drug employed, on the disease orcondition being treated and so forth. In addition, when co-administeredwith one or more biologically active agents, the compound providedherein may be administered either simultaneously with the biologicallyactive agent(s), or sequentially. If administered sequentially, theattending physician will decide on the appropriate sequence ofadministering protein in combination with the biologically activeagent(s).

In any case, the multiple therapeutic agents (one of which is a compoundof Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) described herein) may beadministered in any order or even simultaneously. If simultaneously, themultiple therapeutic agents may be provided in a single, unified form,or in multiple forms (by way of example only, either as a single pill oras two separate pills). One of the therapeutic agents may be given inmultiple doses, or both may be given as multiple doses. If notsimultaneous, the timing between the multiple doses may vary from morethan zero weeks to less than four weeks. In addition, the combinationmethods, compositions and formulations are not to be limited to the useof only two agents; the use of multiple therapeutic combinations arealso envisioned.

It is understood that the dosage regimen to treat, prevent, orameliorate the condition(s) for which relief is sought, can be modifiedin accordance with a variety of factors. These factors include thedisorder or condition from which the subject suffers, as well as theage, weight, sex, diet, and medical condition of the subject. Thus, thedosage regimen actually employed can vary widely and therefore candeviate from the dosage regimens set forth herein.

The pharmaceutical agents which make up the combination therapydisclosed herein may be a combined dosage form or in separate dosageforms intended for substantially simultaneous administration. Thepharmaceutical agents that make up the combination therapy may also beadministered sequentially, with either therapeutic compound beingadministered by a regimen calling for two-step administration. Thetwo-step administration regimen may call for sequential administrationof the active agents or spaced-apart administration of the separateactive agents. The time period between the multiple administration stepsmay range from, a few minutes to several hours, depending upon theproperties of each pharmaceutical agent, such as potency, solubility,bioavailability, plasma half-life and kinetic profile of thepharmaceutical agent. Circadian variation of the target moleculeconcentration may also determine the optimal dose interval.

In addition, the compounds described herein also may be used incombination with procedures that may provide additional or synergisticbenefit to the patient. By way of example only, patients are expected tofind therapeutic and/or prophylactic benefit in the methods describedherein, wherein pharmaceutical composition of a compound disclosedherein and/or combinations with other therapeutics are combined withgenetic testing to determine whether that individual is a carrier of amutant gene that is known to be correlated with certain diseases orconditions.

The compounds described herein and combination therapies can beadministered before, during or after the occurrence of a disease orcondition, and the timing of administering the composition containing acompound can vary. Thus, for example, the compounds can be used as aprophylactic and can be administered continuously to subjects with apropensity to develop conditions or diseases in order to prevent theoccurrence of the disease or condition. The compounds and compositionscan be administered to a subject during or as soon as possible after theonset of the symptoms. The administration of the compounds can beinitiated within the first 48 hours of the onset of the symptoms,preferably within the first 48 hours of the onset of the symptoms, morepreferably within the first 6 hours of the onset of the symptoms, andmost preferably within 3 hours of the onset of the symptoms. The initialadministration can be via any route practical, such as, for example, anintravenous injection, a bolus injection, infusion over about 5 minutesto about 5 hours, a pill, a capsule, transdermal patch, buccal delivery,and the like, or combination thereof. A compound is preferablyadministered as soon as is practicable after the onset of a disease orcondition is detected or suspected, and for a length of time necessaryfor the treatment of the disease, such as, for example, from 1 day toabout 3 months. The length of treatment can vary for each subject, andthe length can be determined using the known criteria. For example, thecompound or a formulation containing the compound can be administeredfor at least 2 weeks, preferably about 1 month to about 5 years.

Inhibitors of SOCE

In one aspect, compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) areadministered or used in conjunction with other inhibitors of SOCE. Inone aspect, the inhibitors of SOCE are non-selective inhibitors.

A variety of inhibitors of SOCE have been described. Inhibitors of SOCEinclude:

a) Cations, which include lanthanide cations, such as for example, Gd³⁺,La³⁺;b) P-450 inhibitors, which include econazole, miconazole, clotrimazole,ketoconazole;c) Cyclooxygenase inhibitors, which include niflumic acid, flufenamicacid, tenidap;d) Lipoxygenase inhibitors, which include nordihydroguaiaretic acid,eicosatetraynoic acid;e) Compounds that are channel blockers, which include SK&F 96365,SC38249, LU52396, L-651,582, tetrandrine, 2-APB;f) Compounds that inhibit SOCE not by an action on the SOC channelsthemselves, which include U73122 (phospholipase C inhibitor), wortmannin(phosphatidylinositol kinase inhibitor).

Some of these inhibitors of SOCE have non-specific actions and/ormultiple modes of action that contribute to the inhibition of SOCE,which include blocking the pore of the SOC channel (Channel blockers),inhibition of mitochondrial ATP synthesis that appears to support SOCE(Gamberucci et al., J Biol. Chem., 269, 23597-23602, 1994; Marriott etal., Am. J. Physiol., 269, C766-C774, 1995), disturbances of cytoplasmicpH (Muallem et al., Am. J. Physiol., 257, G917-G924, 1989), as well asinhibiting the activation of SOC channels.

Immunosuppressants

In one embodiment, compounds described herein are administered as singleagents in immunosuppressive therapy to reduce, inhibit, or preventactivity of the immune system. Immunosuppressive therapy is clinicallyused to: prevent the rejection of transplanted organs and tissues (e.g.bone marrow, heart, kidney, liver); treatment of autoimmune diseases ordiseases that are most likely of autoimmune origin (e.g. rheumatoidarthritis, myasthenia gravis, systemic lupus erythematosus, Crohn'sdisease, and ulcerative colitis); and treatment of some othernon-autoimmune inflammatory diseases (e.g. long term allergic asthmacontrol).

In some embodiments, the compounds described herein are administeredwith other immunosuppressants selected from among: Calcineurininhibitors (such as, but not limited to, cyclosporin, tacrolimus); mTORinhibitors (such as, but not limited to, sirolimus, everolimus);anti-proliferatives (such as, but not limited to, azathioprine,mycophenolic acid); corticosteroids (such as, but not limited to,prednisone, cortisone acetate, prednisolone, methylprednisolone,dexamethasone, betamethasone, triamcinolone, beclometasone,fludrocortisone acetate, deoxycorticosterone acetate, aldosterone,hydrocortisone); antibodies (such as, but not limited to, monoclonalanti-IL-2Rα receptor antibodies (basiliximab, daclizumab), polyclonalanti-T-cell antibodies (anti-thymocyte globulin (ATG), anti-lymphocyteglobulin (ALG))).

Other immunosuppressants include, but are not limited to:glucocorticoids (alclometasone, aldosterone, amcinonide, beclometasone,betamethasone, budesonide, ciclesonide, clobetasol, clobetasone,clocortolone, cloprednol, cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort,deoxycorticosterone, desonide, desoximetasone, desoxycortone,dexamethasone, diflorasone, diflucortolone, difluprednate, fluclorolone,Fludrocortisone, fludroxycortide, flumetasone, flunisolide, fluocinoloneacetonide, fluocinonide, fluocortin, fluocortolone, fluorometholone,fluperolone, fluprednidene, fluticasone, formocortal, halcinonide,halometasone, hydrocortisone/cortisol, hydrocortisone aceponate,hydrocortisone buteprate, hydrocortisone butyrate, loteprednol,medrysone, meprednisone, methylprednisolone, methylprednisoloneaceponate, mometasone furoate, paramethasone, prednicarbate, prednisone,prednisolone, prednylidene, rimexolone, tixocortol, triamcinolone,ulobetasol), cyclophosphamide, nitrosoureas, cisplatin, carboplatin,oxaliplatin, methotrexate, azathioprine, mercaptopurine, pyrimidineanalogues, protein synthesis inhibitors, methotrexate, azathioprine,mercaptopurine, dactinomycin, anthracyclines, mitomycin C, bleomycin,mithramycin, Atgam®, Thymoglobuline®, OKT3®, basiliximab, daclizumab,cyclosporin, tacrolimus, sirolimus, Interferons (IFN-β, IFN-γ), opioids,TNF binding proteins (infliximab, etanercept, adalimumab, golimumab),mycophenolic acid, mycophenolate mofetil, FTY720, as well as thoselisted in U.S. Pat. No. 7,060,697.

Agents for Treating Autoimmune Diseases, Inflammatory Diseases

Where the subject is suffering from or at risk of suffering from anautoimmune disease, disorder or condition, or an inflammatory disease,disorder or condition, a compound described herein is administered inany combination with one or more of the following therapeutic agents:immunosuppressants (e.g., tacrolimus, cyclosporin, rapamicin,methotrexate, cyclophosphamide, azathioprine, mercaptopurine,mycophenolate, or FTY720), glucocorticoids (e.g., prednisone, cortisoneacetate, prednisolone, methylprednisolone, dexamethasone, betamethasone,triamcinolone, beclometasone, fludrocortisone acetate,deoxycorticosterone acetate, aldosterone), non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drugs (e.g., salicylates, arylalkanoic acids,2-arylpropionic acids, N-arylanthranilic acids, oxicams, coxibs, orsulphonanilides), Cox-2-specific inhibitors (e.g., valdecoxib,etoricoxib, lumiracoxib, celecoxib, or rofecoxib), leflunomide, goldthioglucose, gold thiomalate, aurofin, sulfasalazine,hydroxychloroquinine, minocycline, TNF-α binding proteins (e.g.,infliximab, etanercept, or adalimumab), abatacept, anakinra,interferon-β, interferon-γ, interleukin-2, antileukotrienes,theophylline, or anticholinergics.

In one embodiment, compounds described herein, are administered incombination with inhibitors of NFAT-calcineurin pathway. In oneembodiment, the inhibitors of NFAT-calcineurin pathway include, but arenot limited to, Cyclosporin A (CsA) and tacrolimus (FK506).

In one embodiment, a compound described herein, or compositions andmedicaments that include a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV)or (V), are administered to a patient in combination with ananti-inflammatory agent including, but not limited to, non-steroidalanti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs) and corticosteroids (glucocorticoids).

NSAIDs include, but are not limited to: aspirin, salicylic acid,gentisic acid, choline magnesium salicylate, choline salicylate, cholinemagnesium salicylate, choline salicylate, magnesium salicylate, sodiumsalicylate, diflunisal, carprofen, fenoprofen, fenoprofen calcium,fluorobiprofen, ibuprofen, ketoprofen, nabutone, ketolorac, ketorolactromethamine, naproxen, oxaprozin, diclofenac, etodolac, indomethacin,sulindac, tolmetin, meclofenamate, meclofenamate sodium, mefenamic acid,piroxicam, meloxicam, COX-2 specific inhibitors (such as, but notlimited to, celecoxib, rofecoxib, valdecoxib, parecoxib, etoricoxib,lumiracoxib, CS-502, JTE-522, L-745,337 and NS398).

Combinations with NSAIDs, which are selective COX-2 inhibitors, arecontemplated herein. Such compounds include, but are not limited tothose disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,995; U.S. Pat. No. 5,861,419;U.S. Pat. No. 6,001,843; U.S. Pat. No. 6,020,343, U.S. Pat. No.5,409,944; U.S. Pat. No. 5,436,265; U.S. Pat. No. 5,536,752; U.S. Pat.No. 5,550,142; U.S. Pat. No. 5,604,260; U.S. Pat. No. 5,698,584; U.S.Pat. No. 5,710,140; WO 94/15932; U.S. Pat. No. 5,344,991; U.S. Pat. No.5,134,142; U.S. Pat. No. 5,380,738; U.S. Pat. No. 5,393,790; U.S. Pat.No. 5,466,823; U.S. Pat. No. 5,633,272; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,932,598 and6,313,138; all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.

Compounds that have been described as selective COX-2 inhibitors and aretherefore useful in the methods or pharmaceutical compositions describedherein include, but are not limited to, celecoxib, rofecoxib,lumiracoxib, etoricoxib, valdecoxib, and parecoxib, or apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof

Corticosteroids, include, but are not limited to: betamethasone,prednisone, alclometasone, aldosterone, amcinonide, beclometasone,betamethasone, budesonide, ciclesonide, clobetasol, clobetasone,clocortolone, cloprednol, cortisone, cortivazol, deflazacort,deoxycorticosterone, desonide, desoximetasone, desoxycortone,dexamethasone, diflorasone, diflucortolone, difluprednate, fluclorolone,fludrocortisone, fludroxycortide, flumetasone, flunisolide, fluocinoloneacetonide, fluocinonide, fluocortin, fluocortolone, fluorometholone,fluperolone, fluprednidene, fluticasone, formocortal, halcinonide,halometasone, hydrocortisone/cortisol, hydrocortisone aceponate,hydrocortisone buteprate, hydrocortisone butyrate, loteprednol,medrysone, meprednisone, methylprednisolone, methylprednisoloneaceponate, mometasone furoate, paramethasone, prednicarbate,prednisone/prednisolone, rimexolone, tixocortol, triamcinolone, andulobetasol.

Other agents used as anti-inflammatories include those disclosed in U.S.patent publication 2005/0227929, herein incorporated by reference.

Some commercially available anti-inflammatories include, but are notlimited to: Arthrotec® (diclofenac and misoprostol), Asacol®(5-aminosalicyclic acid), Salofalk® (5-aminosalicyclic acid), Auralgan®(antipyrine and benzocaine), Azulfidine® (sulfasalazine), Daypro®(oxaprozin), Lodine® (etodolac), Ponstan® (mefenamic acid), Solumedrol®(methylprednisolone), Bayer®(aspirin), Bufferin® (aspirin), Indocin®(indomethacin), Vioxx® (rofecoxib), Celebrex® (celecoxib), Bextra®(valdecoxib), Arcoxia® (etoricoxib), Prexige® (lumiracoxib), Advil®,Motrin® (ibuprofen), Voltaren®(diclofenac), Orudis®(ketoprofen), Mobic®(meloxicam), Relafen® (nabumetone), Aleve®, Naprosyn® (naproxen),Feldene® (piroxicam).

In one embodiment, compounds described herein are administered incombination with leukotriene receptor antagonists including, but are notlimited to, BAY u9773 (see EP 00791576; published 27 Aug. 1997), DUO-LT(Tsuji et al, Org. Biomol. Chem., 1, 3139-3141, 2003), zafirlukast(Accolate®), montelukast (Singulair®), prankulast (Onon®), andderivatives or analogs thereof.

Kits/Articles of Manufacture

For use in the therapeutic applications described herein, kits andarticles of manufacture are also described herein. Such kits can includea carrier, package, or container that is compartmentalized to receiveone or more containers such as vials, tubes, and the like, each of thecontainer(s) including one of the separate elements to be used in amethod described herein. Suitable containers include, for example,bottles, vials, syringes, and test tubes. The containers can be formedfrom a variety of materials such as glass or plastic.

The articles of manufacture provided herein contain packaging materials.Packaging materials for use in packaging pharmaceutical productsinclude, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,323,907, 5,052,558 and 5,033,252.Examples of pharmaceutical packaging materials include, but are notlimited to, blister packs, bottles, tubes, inhalers, pumps, bags, vials,containers, syringes, bottles, and any packaging material suitable for aselected formulation and intended mode of administration and treatment.A wide array of formulations of the compounds and compositions providedherein are contemplated as are a variety of treatments for any disease,disorder, or condition that would benefit by inhibition of CRAC channelactivity.

For example, the container(s) can include one or more compoundsdescribed herein, optionally in a composition or in combination withanother agent as disclosed herein. The container(s) optionally have asterile access port (for example the container can be an intravenoussolution bag or a vial having a stopper pierceable by a hypodermicinjection needle). Such kits optionally comprising a compound with anidentifying description or label or instructions relating to its use inthe methods described herein.

A kit will typically may include one or more additional containers, eachwith one or more of various materials (such as reagents, optionally inconcentrated form, and/or devices) desirable from a commercial and userstandpoint for use of a compound described herein. Non-limiting examplesof such materials include, but not limited to, buffers, diluents,filters, needles, syringes; carrier, package, container, vial and/ortube labels listing contents and/or instructions for use, and packageinserts with instructions for use. A set of instructions will alsotypically be included.

A label can be on or associated with the container. A label can be on acontainer when letters, numbers or other characters forming the labelare attached, molded or etched into the container itself; a label can beassociated with a container when it is present within a receptacle orcarrier that also holds the container, e.g., as a package insert. Alabel can be used to indicate that the contents are to be used for aspecific therapeutic application. The label can also indicate directionsfor use of the contents, such as in the methods described herein.

In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions can be presentedin a pack or dispenser device which can contain one or more unit dosageforms containing a compound provided herein. The pack can for examplecontain metal or plastic foil, such as a blister pack. The pack ordispenser device can be accompanied by instructions for administration.The pack or dispenser can also be accompanied with a notice associatedwith the container in form prescribed by a governmental agencyregulating the manufacture, use, or sale of pharmaceuticals, whichnotice is reflective of approval by the agency of the form of the drugfor human or veterinary administration. Such notice, for example, can bethe labeling approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration forprescription drugs, or the approved product insert. Compositionscontaining a compound provided herein formulated in a compatiblepharmaceutical carrier can also be prepared, placed in an appropriatecontainer, and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition.

Assays

Several techniques may be used to evaluate store operated calcium entryand calcium signaling in cells. Such techniques include, but are notlimited to, patch clamp electrophysiology (measurement of calcium ionsor other ions across cell membranes, such as plasma membranes),capacitance measurements (allows exocytosis to be followed at the levelof single cells), calcium imaging using fluorescent dyes allows patternsof calcium movement within the cytoplasm to be tracked, fluorescenceresonance energy transfer (FRET) enables protein-protein interactions tobe evaluated, and molecular biology methods allow for the manipulationof the levels of expression of proteins of interest.

A wide variety of assay methods may be used to examine the modulation ofintracellular calcium by compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or(V). Such assays include in vitro cell based assays as well as in vivoanimal models. Any assays that detect, monitor or measure an effect onintracellular calcium, including calcium entry-mediated events can beused. Such assays include, but are not limited to, assays monitoring,measuring and/or detecting intracellular calcium levels, modulation ofcalcium levels, and movement of calcium into, out of or within cells andintracellular organelles. Assays can also include monitoring, measuringand/or detecting calcium entry-mediated events and molecules involved incalcium entry-mediated events such as, but not limited to, signaltransduction molecules, transcription factors, secreted molecules andother molecules that are affected by changes in calcium homeostasis.Assays include, but are not limited to, those described herein and thosedescribed in US patent publication no. 2007/0031814 and WO 07/081804,herein incorporated by reference.

Cells and Cell Models

For in vitro testing of the modulation of intracellular calcium bycompounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V), a wide variety ofcell types for such assays are available. In a particular embodiment,the cell is one in which store-operated calcium entry occurs or that canbe manipulated such that store-operated calcium entry occurs in thecell. In particular embodiments, the cell contains one or more proteinsinvolved in modulating intracellular calcium (and, in particular, isinvolved in, participates in and/or provides for store-operated calciumentry, movement of calcium into, out of or within an intracellularorganelle or calcium store, modulation of calcium levels in anintracellular organelle or calcium store (e.g., endoplasmic reticulum)and/or calcium buffering), such as those provided herein. In particularembodiments, the protein(s) include STIM proteins (including STIM1,STIM2, DSTIM and CSTIM protein) and/or Orai proteins (Orai1, Orai2,Orai3). The cell may endogenously express the protein(s) orrecombinantly express the protein(s).

Cells for use in the methods may be of any species. In one embodiment,the cells can be eukaryotic cells. In one embodiment, the cells can beyeast, insect (e.g., Drosophila or Anopheles), or mammalian cells.Mammalian cells include, but are not limited to, rodent (e.g., mouse,rat and hamster), primate, monkey, dog, bovine, rabbit and human cells.A variety of cell types can be used in the methods, including, forexample, neuronal, nervous system, brain, immune system cells, e.g., Tlymphocytes and B cells, primary cells, blood and hematopoietic cells,stromal cells, myeloid cells, lymphoid cells, and a variety of tumor andcancer cells. Particular cells include Drosophila Schneider 2 or S2cells, human embryonic kidney (HEK293) cells, rat basophilic leukemia(RBL-2H3) cells, Jurkat cells, epithelial cells, rhabdomyosarcoma cells,rhabdoid cells, retinoblastoma cells, neuroepithelioma cells,neuroblastoma cells, osteosarcoma cells, fibroblasts, bone marrow stromacells, erythroleukemia cells and lymphoblast cells. Other cell linesinclude HEK 293 and 293T, CHO (including CHO-K1), LTK-, N2A, H6, andHGB. Many such cells and cell lines are available through celldepositories such as, for example, the American Type Culture Collection(ATCC, Manassas, Va.). Primary cells can be obtained by isolation fromtissue sources.

Cells from a known cell line can be used, such as neuroblastoma SH-SY5Ycells, pheochromocytoma PC12 cells, neuroblastoma SK-N-BE(2)C or SK-N-SHcells, human SK-N-MC neuroepithelioma cells, SMS-KCNR cells, human LAN-5neuroblastoma cells, human GI-CA-N neuroblastoma cells, human GOTOneuroblastoma cells, mouse Neuro 2a (N2A) neuroblastoma cells and/orhuman IMR 32 neuroblastoma cells, chronic myeloid leukemia cells (e.g.,human K562 cells), promyelocytic leukemia cells (e.g., HL60 cells) andhistiocytic lymphoma cells (e.g., U937 cells), Burkitt's lymphoma cells(e.g., CA46 cells), B-cells (e.g., NALM6), acute lymphoblastic leukemiacells (e.g., MOLT4 cells), T cells (e.g. Jurkat cells) and early T-ALL(e.g., DU528) cells.

In one embodiment, the choice of a cell for use in an in vitro assay totest the modulation of intracellular calcium by compounds describedherein involves several considerations, including, for example, aparticular protein that is being used in the method and a particularaspect or activity of intracellular calcium modulation that is beingmonitored or assessed in the method.

In one embodiment, the modulation of intracellular calcium by a compounddescribed herein is examined by monitoring or assessing the effect onstore-operated calcium entry. Cells typically used in such methodsexhibit store-operated calcium entry either naturally or throughmanipulation of the cells. Cells that endogenously exhibitstore-operated calcium entry include some excitable cells and mostnon-excitable cells and can be identified using methods described hereinand/or recognized in the field.

In one embodiment, it may be desirable to utilize a cell that containscomponents of signaling and messenger systems that can effect release ofcalcium from intracellular stores. For example, cells containingcomponents of receptor-mediated phospholipase C (PLC) activation systemscan be used for physiological activation (via generation of IP₃) ofstore depletion to facilitate monitoring of store-operated calciumentry. Receptor-mediated PLC activation occurs through distinct couplingmechanisms: PLC-β activation by G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) andPLC-γ activation by tyrosine kinase receptors and nonreceptor tyrosinekinases. Thus, cells containing a receptor-mediated PLC-activationsystem can be monitored or assessed for store-operated calcium entryupon agonist activation of one or more receptors known to participate inthe system. (see e.g. Bouron (2000) FEBS Lett 470:269-272; Millar et al.(1995) J. Exp. Biol. 198:1843-1850; Yagodin et al. (1998) Cell Calcium23:219-228; Yagodin et al. (1999) Cell Calcium 25:429-438; and Pattersonet al. (2002) Cell 111:1-20).

An assessment of intracellular calcium after treatment with a compounddescribed herein can be made under a variety of conditions. Conditionscan be selected to evaluate the effect of test agent on a specificaspect of intracellular calcium. For example, reagents and conditionsare used, for specifically evaluating store-operated calcium entry,resting cytosolic calcium levels, calcium buffering, and calcium levelsof and calcium uptake by or release from intracellular organelles.Resting cytosolic calcium levels, intracellular organelle calcium levelsand cation movement may be assessed using any of the methods describedherein or recognized in the field. Such methods of assessing modulationin intracellular calcium include, but are not limited to,calcium-sensitive indicator-based measurements, such as fluo-3, mag-fura2 and ER-targeted aequorin, labeled calcium (such as ⁴⁵Ca²⁺)-basedmeasurements, and electrophysiological measurements. Particular aspectsof ion flux that may be assessed include, but are not limited to, areduction (including elimination) in the amount of ion flux, alteredbiophysical properties of the ion current, and altered sensitivities ofthe flux to activators or inhibitors of calcium flux processes, such as,for example, store-operated calcium entry. Reagents and conditions foruse in specifically evaluating receptor-mediated calcium movement andsecond messenger-operated calcium movement are also available.

Evaluation of Store-Operated Calcium Entry

In one aspect, compounds described herein are added to cells underconditions that permit store-operated calcium entry to occur in order toassess the effects of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) onstore-operated calcium entry. Such conditions are described herein andare recognized in the field.

For example, in one method cells may be treated to reduce the calciumlevels of intracellular calcium stores and then analyzed for evidence ofion (e.g., calcium) influx in response thereto in the presence of acompound described herein. Techniques for reducing calcium levels ofintracellular stores and for analyzing cells for evidence of ion (e.g.,calcium) influx are recognized in the field and described herein.

In other methods, electrophysiological analysis of currents across acell-detached plasma membrane patch or an outside-out membrane vesiclemay be used to detect or monitor store-operated channel currents (e.g.,I_(SOC), I_(CRAC)) in the presence of a compound described herein.

Evaluation of Calcium Entry-Mediated Events

A number of molecules involved in calcium-regulated pathways are known.Evaluation of molecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events can beused to monitor intracellular calcium, and can be used, for example inscreening assays described herein to monitor the effects of thecompounds presented herein. Examples of assays include but are notlimited to assays which detect, or determine the presence, levels,alteration of levels, production, modification (such as phosphorylationand dephosphorylation), translocation, degradation and activity ofmolecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events (see for example,Trevillyan et al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem. 276:48118-26). The assaysdescribed herein can be used with cells that have been treated with orcontacted with a compound presented herein, or that express an alteredamount of a test molecule (such as a protein involved in calciumregulation, including a STIM protein, Orai protein), or with controlcells. The assays can also be conducted in cells that have beenstimulated with a physiological or non-physiological activator, or inunstimulated cells. The following are representative assays formolecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events and are meant to beexemplary only. Other assays for these molecules and assays for othermolecules involved in calcium-entry mediated events can also be employedin any of the screening and/or modulation methods described herein.

β-Hexosaminidase Release

In mast cells, Ca²⁺ influx results in degranulation and release ofinflammatory mediators such as heparin, histamine and enzymes such asβ-hexosaminidase. Detecting and/or measuring release of such moleculescan thus be used to monitor intracellular calcium. For example, mediafrom mast cells can be collected. A suitable substrate forβ-hexosaminidase (e.g. p-nitrophenyl-acetyl-glucosamide) can then beadded and the absorbance of the resulting mixture assessed to measurethe relative amount of β-hexosaminidase activity in the samples (Funabaet al. (2003) Cell Biol. International 27:879-85).

Calcium/Calmodulin-Dependent CaN Phosphatase Activity

The phosphatase calcineurin (CaN) dephosphorylates various proteins,affecting their activity and localization. CaN activity can be assessedby incubating purified CaN and a CaN substrate, for example aradiolabeled peptide corresponding to a sequence in the RII subunit ofcAMP-dependent kinase, either with or without a compound of Formulas(I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) (see, Trevillyan et al. (2001) J. Biol.Chem 276:48118-26). The level of radiolabeled peptide and/or the amountof free inorganic phosphate released can be measured to assess CaNdephosphorylation activity.

NFAT Transcriptional Activity

The NFAT (nuclear factor of activated T cells) transcription factorregulates a number of genes in response to intracellular calcium levels.For example, NFAT proteins regulate the transcription of cytokine genesinvolved in the immune response. Promoters from NFAT-regulated genes,and/or regulatory regions and elements from these genes, can be used tomonitor NFAT regulated expression and thereby monitor intracellularcalcium. Reporter gene fusions can be constructed with NFAT regulatedpromoters or NFAT-regulated elements operably linked to a reporter genesuch as luciferase, β-galactosidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP) orany other known reporter in the art (see for example, Published U.S.Application no. 2002-0034728). The amount of reporter protein oractivity is a measure of NFAT activity.

NFAT Phosphorylation

NFAT activation is regulated primarily through its phosphorylation,which in turn regulates its subcellular localization. In unstimulatedcells, NFAT is a hyperphosphorylated cytosolic protein. An elevation inintracellular Ca²⁺, induced by a variety of mechanisms, increases theactivity of the Ca²⁺-calmodulin-dependent phosphatase, calcineurin.Activated calcineurin dephosphorylates multiple serine residues withinthe regulatory region of the NFAT molecule. NFAT is rephosphorylated inresponse to decreases in Ca²⁺ levels or CaN inhibition.

The phosphorylation state of NFAT can be monitored for example, byexpressing a detectably tagged NFAT protein in cells, such as a His6tagged-NFAT. Tagged NFAT can be purified from cells using Ni²⁺chromatography and subjected to gel electrophoresis and staining orwestern blotting. More highly phosphorylated forms of NFAT can bedistinguished by their slower migration. The state of phosphorylatedNFAT can be used as a measure of NFAT activation (see, Trevillyan et al.(2001) J. Biol. Chem 276:48118-26).

NFAT Nuclear Localization

NFAT localization between the cytoplasm and nucleus is regulated by thephosphorylation state of NFAT. Phosphorylation of NFAT prevents nuclearlocalization by masking the nuclear localization sequence. NFAT nuclearlocalization can be monitored, for example, by expressing fluorescentlytagged NFAT, for example, GFP-NFAT, in cells. Confocal microscopy can beused to monitor nuclear localization of the tagged NFAT (see, Trevillyanet al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem 276:48118-26).

Cytokine Secretion

Cytokine secretion, such as IL-2 secretion, can be monitored usingprotein detection assays. For example, supernatant can be collected fromimmune cells. An ELISA assay or other suitable format with IL-2antibodies can be used to detect and/or measure the amount of IL-2secreted as compared to control cells. Secretion of other cytokines, forexample, TNF-α, can also be detected in similar assays.

Cytokine Expression

Expression of cytokines, such as, but not limited to IL-2, can beassessed either directly or indirectly in cells. For example, inindirect methods, an IL-2 promoter can be operably linked to a reportergene such as luciferase or β-galactosidase, and the reporter constructintroduced into cells. Reporter gene expression can be monitored andcompared to gene expression in control cells (see, Trevillyan et al.(2001) J. Biol. Chem 276:48118-26). Alternatively, expression ofendogenous or recombinant IL-2 mRNA or protein can be assessed.

T Cell Proliferation

Cytokines such as IL-2 are necessary for T-cell proliferation inresponse to mitogen or alloantigen stimulation, and thus T-cellproliferation is altered by changes in cytokine expression or secretion.T cells can be induced, such as with concanavalin A or alloreactivelymphocytes and T cell proliferation measured, for example, bysubjecting cells to a pulse of ³H-thymidine and measuring ³H-thymidineincorporation (see, Trevillyan et al. (2001) J. Biol. Chem276:48118-26).

In some embodiments, the modulation (e g inhibition or reduction) ofSOCE by compounds presented herein are determined by evaluation of anyof the following criteria:

a. there is direct inhibition of increased [Ca²⁺]_(i) as measured by acalcium indicator;b. there is a direct inhibition of I_(SOC) or I_(CRAC) as measured bypatch clamp;c. there is inhibition of downstream signaling functions such ascalcineurin activity, NFAT subcellular localization, NFATphosphorylation, and/or cytokine, e.g., IL-2, production; ord. there are modifications in activation-induced cell proliferation,differentiation and/or apoptotic signaling pathways.

Animal Models

Animal models that can be used in embodiments of the methods furtherinclude animals, such as, but not limited to non-human animals, whichhave, in at least some of their cells, an alteration or defect in, oraberrant functioning of, a cellular process which relies on or isregulated by intracellular calcium. Cellular processes that rely on orare regulated by intracellular calcium include, for example, cellularactivation, gene expression, cellular trafficking, and apoptosis.Diseases/disorders that involve defects that may be at least partiallycompensated for by modulation of intracellular calcium include, but arenot limited to: autoimmune disorders, including rheumatoid arthritis,inflammatory bowel disease, Sjogren's syndrome (cytokines associatedwith lymphocyte invasion of salivary epithelial cells can reduce calciummobilization in parotid cells; also, T-cell activation, includingactivation of transcription factors, cytokine gene expression and cellproliferation, depends on sustained elevation of intracellular calciumlevel provided by store-operated calcium influx), asthma (store-operatedcalcium entry may play an important role in mediating bronchialchonstriction and bronchial smooth muscle cell proliferation),glomerulonephritis and glomerular inflammation (changes in intracellularcalcium, such as by store-operated calcium entry, signal monocyteadhesion in a co-culture model of glomerular inflammation).

Types of animal models include, but are not limited to, non-humananimals, such as non-human invertebrates and vertebrates and non-humanmammals, rodents (e.g., mice, rat and hamster), cows, chickens, pigs,goats, dogs, sheep, insects, Drosophila, nematodes, worms, C. elegans,monkeys, gorillas, and other primates.

Animal models include transgenic and non-transgenic animals. One exampleof such an animal model that can be used in particular embodiments ofthe methods is a rodent model of airway hyperresponsiveness (AHR), acharacteristic of asthma. This model can be generated, for example, bysensitization through immunization with ovalbumin followed by exposureto aerosolized ovalbumin and challenge by cholinergic stimulation (e.g.,via administration of methacholine or acetylcholine) (see, e.g., Xu etal. (2002) J. Appl. Physiol. 93:1833-1840; Humbles et at (2002) Proc.Natl. Acad. Sci. 99:1479-1484). Airway hyperresponsiveness (which can beevaluated using methods, such as for e.g., using barometricplethysmography to record respiratory pressure curves and throughmeasurement of pulmonary parameters such as pulmonary conductance andpulmonary compliance) can be assessed and compared in animals treatedand not treated with a compound presented herein. A further example ofan animal model that can be used in particular embodiments of themethods is a rodent model of mesangial proliferative glomerulonephritis,which can be generated, for example, by administration of anti-Thy1.1antibody (see, e.g., Jefferson and Johnson (1999) J. Nephrol.12:297-307). Any number of parameters indicative of glomerulonephritisor renal dysfunction (e.g., mesangial cell proliferation, bloodpressure, urinary protein excretion, creatinine clearance,glomerulosclerosis index and other parameters) can be evaluated andcompared in animals treated with and not treated with test agent. Thenon-obese diabetic (NOD) mouse, an inbred mouse strain thatspontaneously develops autoimmune diabetes that shares manyimmunogenetic features with Type 1 diabetes mellitus, is another exampleof an animal model that can be used in a particular embodiment of themethods. These mice also manifest many characteristics of autoimmuneexocrinopathy (such as Sjorgen's syndrome) including declining exocrinetissue secretory function (see, e.g., Humphreys-Beher and Peck (1999)Arch. Oral Biol. 44 Suppl 1:S21-25 and Brayer et al. (2000) J Rheumatol.27:1896-1904). Characteristics relevant to Sjorgen's syndrome (e.g.,lymphocytic infiltrates in exocrine glands (e.g., salivary and lacrimalglands), presence of dendritic cells and macrophages in submandibularglands, integrity of the lacrimal gland by measurement of basal andstimulated tear secretion, saliva flow rates and amylase activity) canbe evaluated and compared in animals treated with and not treated with acompound described herein. An animal (e.g., rodent) model of autoimmunedisease can also be used in particular embodiments of the methods. Suchanimals include rat models available through the National Institutes ofHealth (NIH) Autoimmune Rat Model Repository and Development Center(Bethesda, Md.; accessible at www.ors.od.nih.gov/dirs/vrp/ratcenter).One rat model of rheumatoid arthritis (RA) and relatedchronic/inflammatory autoimmune diseases is the collagen-inducedarthritis (CIA) model (see, e.g., Griffiths and Remmers (2001) Immunol.Rev. 184:172-183). Characteristic phenotypes of autoimmune disease (e.g.altered levels of immune reactivity to self-antigens, chronicinflammation of autoantigen-expressing target organs, and activation andparticipation of invading mononuclear cells and tissue fibroblasts inorgan damage) can be evaluated and compared in animals treated with andnot treated with a compound presented herein. An animal (e.g., rodent)model of neuropathic or inflammatory pain can also be used in aparticular embodiment of the methods. For example, one rat model ofneuropathic pain involves development of tactile allodynia (exaggeratedresponse to otherwise innocuous stimuli) after ligation of lumbar spinalnerves (see, e.g., Chaplan et al. (1994) J. Neurosci. Methods 53:55-63and Luo et al. (2001) J. Neurosci. 21:1868-1875). Tactile allodynia, onecharacteristic feature of neuropathic pain, can be evaluated (e.g., byevaluating paw withdrawal threshold in response to application ofpressure) and compared in animals treated and not treated with acompound described herein.

EXAMPLES

These examples are provided for illustrative purposes only and not tolimit the scope of the claims provided herein. The starting materialsand reagents used for the synthesis of the compounds described hereinmay be synthesized or can be obtained from commercial sources, such as,but not limited to, Sigma-Aldrich, Acros Organics, Fluka, and FischerScientific.

Example A Preparation of 6-acetamido-N-methoxy-N-methylnicotinamide (4)

Under an atmosphere of argon acetyl chloride 2 (2.4 mL, 33 mmol) intetrahydrofuran (10 mL) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of 1(2.0 g, 13 mmol) and Hünig's base (9.2 mL, 53 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran(75 mL) at −20° C. The reaction was warmed to room temperature andstirred for 6 h then quenched with saturated sodium bicarbonate solution(100 mL). The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (3×75 mL) andcombined extracts dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was dissolved indry methanol (100 mL) then a catalytic amount of NaOMe was added. Themixture was stirred at room temperature 14 h. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system,silica, 0-100% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 3 (2.44 g, 96%) as asolid: LRESIMS m/z 195.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₉H₁₁N₂O₃ 195.1.

Under an atmosphere of argon, n-butyl lithium (50 mL of 2.5 M sol inhexane, 125 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution ofN,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (6.1 g, 63 mmol) in THF (200 mL)at −78° C. The reaction was stirred for 5 minutes then removed from coldbath and stirred for 20 minutes. The mixture was cooled back down to−78° C. and ester 3 in THF (50 mL) added. The mixture was stirred for 2h at −78° C. then quenched by addition of 2 M HCl (63 mL) then saturatedammonium chloride solution (60 mL). The mixture was extracted with ethylacetate (2×250 mL) and the combined extracts washed with brine (100 mL)then dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture was concentrated underreduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system, silica, 0-100%ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 4 (2.65 g, 94%) as a solid: LRESIMSm/z 224.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₀H₁₄N₃O₃ 224.1.

Example B Preparation of N-(5-propionylpyridin-2-yl)acetamide (5)

Under an atmosphere of argon, ethylmagnesium chloride (15 mL of 2.0 Msol in THF, 24 mmol) was added dropwise to a stirred solution of amide 4(1.5 g, 6.7 mmol) in THF (100 mL) at −78° C. The reaction was stirredfor 5 minutes then slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for 3h. The mixture was cooled back down to −78° C. and quenched by additionof 2 M HCl (15 mL) then saturated ammonium chloride solution (20 mL).The mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (1×150 mL) and thendichloromethane (2×100 mL) and combined extracts dried with brine (100mL) then sodium sulfate. The mixture was concentrated under reducedpressure then triturated (dichloromethane in hexane) to provided 5 (1.2g, 94%) as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 193.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₀H₁₃N₂O₂193.1.

Example C Preparation of N-(5-butyrylpyridin-2-yl)acetamide (6)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example B,N-(5-butyrylpyridin-2-yl)acetamide (6) was prepared starting from amide4. LRESIMS m/z 207.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₁H₁₅N₂O₂ 207.1.

Example D Preparation of5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12)

Ketone 5 (1.23 g, 6.4 mmol) and trimethylphenylammonium tribromide (2.5g, 6.7 mmol) in THF (110 mL) was heated at 60° C. with stirring for 2 h.The mixture was then cooled and diluted with ethyl acetate (150 mL),washed with water (3×100 mL) and brine (100 mL) then dried with sodiumsulfate and concentrated under reduced pressure. The mixture wastriturated (dichloromethane in hexane) to provide 7 (1.1 g, 62%) as asolid: LRESIMS m/z 271.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₀H₁₂Br₁N₂O₂ 271.0.

Bromide 7 (0.3 g, 1.1 mmol) and amide 8 (0.3 g, 2.7 mmol) intrifluoroacetic acid (0.5 mL) was heated at 130° C. with stirring for 1day. The mixture was then cooled and concentrated under reducedpressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system, silica, 0-50% ethyl acetatein hexane) provided 9 (59 mg, 19%) as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 286.1 [M+H]⁺,calcd. for C₁₂H₁₁F₃N₃O₂ 286.1.

Under an atmosphere of argon, dimethylaminopyridine (3 mg) was added toa stirred solution of 9 (59 mg, 0.2 mmol) and Boc anhydride (133 mg, 0.6mmol) in acetonitrile (1.0 mL) at room temperature. The reaction wasstirred for overnight. The solution was concentrated under reducedpressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system, silica, 0-25% ethyl acetatein hexane) provided 10 (65 mg, 83%) as an solid: LRESIMS m/z 385.8[M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₇H₁₉F₃N₃O₄ 386.1.

To a solution of carbamate 10 (65 mg, 0.3 mmol) in 3:2 THF:methanol (1mL) was added 2 M sodium hydroxide solution (150 μL) at roomtemperature. The reaction was stirred for 2 h. The solution wasextracted with dichloromethane (3×5 mL) and combined extracts dried withsodium sulfate. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure.Flash chromatography (ISCO system, silica, 0-30% ethyl acetate inhexane) provided 11 (43 mg, 74%) as a solid: LRESIMS m/z 343.8 [M+H]⁺,calcd. for C₁₅H₁₇F₃N₃O₃ 344.1.

Under an atmosphere of argon, trifluoroacetic acid (0.2 mL) was added toa stirred solution of 11 (43 mg, 126 μmol) in dichloromethane (1.0 mL)at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 25 min thenconcentrated under reduced pressure to provided crude 12: LRESIMS m/z244.2 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₀H₉F₃N₃O₁ 244.1.

Example E Preparation of5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (13)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example D,5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (13) wasprepared starting from ketone 6. LRESIMS m/z 258.2 [M+H]⁺, calcd. forC₁₁H₁₁F₃N₃O₁ 258.1.

Example 1 Preparation of2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(14)

Under an atmosphere of argon 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (10 mg, 60μmol) was added to a stirred solution of 12 (3.0 mg, 12 μmol) andHünig's base (33 μL, 25 mg, 190 μmol)) in dichloromethane (0.5 mL) atroom temperature. The reaction was stirred for 1 hour then quenched withmethanol (0.5 mL) and then concentrated under reduced pressure. Thecrude material was dissolved in tetrahydrofuran (1 mL), methanol (0.75mL) and 2 M sodium hydroxide solution (0.25 mL). The mixture was stirredfor 1 h at room temperature then extracted with dichloromethane (2×5 mL)and combined extracts dried with sodium sulfate. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure. Flash chromatography (ISCO system,silica, 0-20% ethyl acetate in hexane) provided 14 (2.3 mg, 51%) as asolid: LRESIMS m/z 384.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₇H₁₁F₅N₃O₂ 384.1.

Example 2 Preparation of2-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(15)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,2-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(15) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 2-methylbenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 362.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd.for C₁₅H₁₅F₃N₃O₂ 362.1.

Example 3 Preparation of2-fluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(16)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,2-fluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(16) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 2-fluorobenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 366.1 [M+H]⁺ calcd.for C₁₇H₁₂F₄N₃O₂ 366.1.

Example 4 Preparation of3,5-difluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)isonicotinamide(17)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,3,5-difluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)isonicotinamide(17) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 3,5-difluoroisonicotinoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 385.1[M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₆H₁₀F₅N₄O₂ 385.1.

Example 5 Preparation of2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(18)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(18) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 2,4,6-trifluorobenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 402.1 [M+H]⁺,calcd. for C₁₇H₁₀F₆N₃O₂ 402.1.

Example 6 Preparation of3-fluoro-2-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(19)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,3-fluoro-2-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(19) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 3-fluoro-2-methylbenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 380.1[M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₅H₁₄F₄N₃O₂ 380.1.

Example 7 Preparation of4-fluoro-2-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(20)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,4-fluoro-2-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(20) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 4-fluoro-2-methylbenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 380.1[M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₅H₁₄F₄N₃O₂ 380.1.

Example 8 Preparation of2-fluoro-6-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(21)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,2-fluoro-6-methyl-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(21) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 2-fluoro-6-methylbenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 380.1[M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₅H₁₄F₄N₃O₂ 380.1.

Example 9 Preparation of2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(22)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(22) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 2,3,6-trifluorobenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 402.1 [M+H]⁺,calcd. for C₁₇H₁₃F₆N₃O₂ 402.1.

Example 10 Preparation of2-chloro-3-fluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(23)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,2-chloro-3-fluoro-N-(5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)benzamide(23) was prepared from5-(5-methyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (12) byreacting with 2-chloro-3-fluorobenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 400.1[M+H]⁺, calcd. for C₁₇H₁₁Cl₁F₄N₃O₂ 400.1.

Example 11 Preparation ofN-(5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)-2-fluorobenzamide(24)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,N-(5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)-2-fluorobenzamide(24) was prepared from5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (13) byreacting with 2-fluorobenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 380.1 [M+H]⁺, calcd.for C₁₅H₁₄F₄N₃O₂ 380.1.

Example 12 Preparation ofN-(5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(25)

In a similar procedure to that described in Example 1,N-(5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-yl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide(25) was prepared from5-(5-ethyl-2-(trifluoromethyl)oxazol-4-yl)pyridin-2-amine (13) byreacting with 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride. LRESIMS m/z 398.1 [M+H]⁺,calcd. for C₁₅H₁₃F₅N₃O₂ 398.1.

Example 13 Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[5-[1-methyl-3-(1,3-thiazol-2-yl)pyrazol-5-yl](2-thienyl)]carboxamide(6)

To a solution of 1 (1.5 g, 10 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added NaH (1.2 g,50 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and MeI (2.8 g, 20 mmol) wasadded in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h at roomtemperature. The reaction was quenched with MeOH and solvent was removedin vacuo. The residue was treated with water and EtOAc. The organiclayer was separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. Thecombined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentratedto give crude product. The crude product was purified on ISCO columns.Fractions containing pure product were combined and evaporated to afford2 (1.5 g, 91%) as a yellow oil.

A solution of 2 (395 mg, 2.4 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was cooled at −78° C.followed by addition of 2.5 M n-BuLi (1.4 mL, 3.6 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 4 h at −78° C. and then trimethyl borate (0.4 mL, 3.6 mmol)was added. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature andstirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 1M HCl and stirred for0.5 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The combinedorganic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to giveboronic acid 3 (317 mg, 63%) as a yellow solid.

Boronic acid 3 (63 mg, 0.3 mmol) and 2-bromo-5-nitrothiophene (63 mg,0.3 mmol) were dissolved in 1 mL dioxane and 1 mL MeCN. 0.5 mL of 2MK₃PO₄ was added and the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before theaddition ofbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 21 mg, 0.03 mmol). The reaction was heated at 90° C. for 2 h.The reaction mixture was cooled, extracted with EtOAc, and purified byflash column to afford 4 which was reduced to amine 5 by hydrogenationwith catalyst Pd—C in MeOH.

To a solution of 5 (11 mg, 0.042 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol). To the solution wasadded 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (15 mg, 0.08 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography to afford 6 (1 mg, 7%) as ayellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₁₈H₁₂F₂N₄OS₂: 402. found: 403 (M+1). ¹HNMR (DMSO-d₆) δ 4.02 (s, 3H), 6.87 (d, 1H, J=4.0), 6.91 (s, 1H),7.29-7.32 (m, 3H), 7.63-7.67 (m, 1H), 7.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0), 7.88 (d, 1H,J=3.0), 12.31 (s, 1H).

Example 14 Preparation of(2,4-difluorophenyl)-N-[5-[1-methyl-3-(1,3-thiazol-2-yl)pyrazol-5-yl](2-thienyl)]carboxamide(7)

To a solution of 5 (11 mg, 0.042 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol). To the solution wasadded 2,4-difluorobenzoyl chloride (15 mg, 0.08 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography and afforded 7 (1 mg, 7%) asa yellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₁₈H₁₂F₂N₄OS₂: 402. found: 403 (M+1).

Example 15 Preparation of(2,4,6-trifluorophenyl)-N-[5-[1-methyl-3-(1,3-thiazol-2-yl)pyrazol-5-yl](2-thienyl)]carboxamide(10)

2-bromo-5-nitrothiophene (1.04 g, 5 mmol) was mixed with HOAc (2 mL),Ac₂O (2 mL) and iron powder (1.25 g, 25 mmol). The mixture was heated at100° C. for 0.5 h. The reaction was quenched with 2M NaOH and the solidwas filtered and washed with EtOAc. The filtrate was worked-up withEtOAc extraction. The 5-bromo-2-thienylacetamide was obtained from ISCOpurification. To a solution of 5-bromo-2-thienylacetamide (190 mg, 0.9mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (10 mL) was added 2,4,6-trifluorobenzoyl chloride (2mmol), N,N-diisopropylethylamine (4 mmol) and a catalytic amount ofDMAP. The mixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reactionwas quenched with saturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) andextracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried(Na₂SO₄) and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in THF (2mL) and MeOH (2 mL). 1M NaOH (2 mL) was added and the reaction mixturewas stirred for 0.5 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture wasconcentrated and worked-up with EtOAc-Brine. Intermediate 9 was obtainedfrom ISCO purification (2935 mg, 97%) as a yellow solid. Boronic acid 3(176 mg, 0.84 mmol) and 9 (235 mg, 0.7 mmol) were dissolved in 2 mLdioxane and 2 mL MeCN. 0.5 ml of 2M K₃PO₄ was added and the mixture wasbubbled with Ar for 1 min before addition ofbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 50 mg, 0.07 mmol). The reaction was heated at 90° C. for 2 h.The reaction mixture was worked-up with EtOAc extraction and product waspurified by flash column to afford 10 (41 mg, 14%) as a yellow solid.LC-MS: calcd. for C₁₈H₁₁F₃N₄OS₂: 420. found: 421 (M+1). ¹H NMR (DMSO-d₆)δ 4.01 (s, 3H), 6.88 (d, 1H, J=4.0), 7.31 (d, 1H, J=4.0), 7.43-7.46 (m,2H), 7.71 (d, 1H, J=3.0), 7.88 (d, 1H, J=3.0), 12.31 (s, 1H).

Example 16 Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[5-[1-ethyl-3-(1,3-thiazol-2-yl)pyrazol-5-yl](2-thienyl)]carboxamide(15)

To a solution of 1 (0.75 g, 5 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added NaH (1.2 g,50 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and EtBr (1.1 g, 10 mmol) wasadded in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred for 18 h at roomtemperature. The reaction was quenched with MeOH and the solvent wasremoved in vacuo. The residue was treated with water and EtOAc. Theorganic layer was separated and aqueous solution was extracted withEtOAc. The combined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, andconcentrated to give the crude product. The crude product was purifiedon ISCO columns. Fractions containing pure product were combined andevaporated to give 11 (954 mg, 100%) as a white solid.

A solution of 11 (954 mg, 5.3 mmol) in THF (5 mL) was cooled at −78° C.followed by addition of 2.5M n-BuLi (3 mL, 7.5 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 6 h at −78° C. and trimethyl borate (0.8 mL, 7.2 mmol) wasadded. The reaction mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirredovernight. The reaction mixture was quenched with 1M HCl and stirred for0.5 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The combinedorganic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to giveboronic acid 12 (1.18 g, 100%) as a white solid.

To a solution of 5-bromo-2-thienylacetamide (298 mg, 1.35 mmol) inCH₂Cl₂ (10 mL) was added 2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (2 mmol),N,N-diisopropylethylamine (4 mmol), and a catalytic amount of DMAP. Themixture was stirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction wasquenched with saturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extractedwith EtOAc (20 mL×2). The combined organic layers were dried (Na₂SO₄)and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was dissolved in THF (2 mL) andMeOH (2 mL). 1M NaOH (2 mL) was added and the reaction mixture wasstirred for 0.5 h at room temperature. The reaction mixture wasconcentrated and worked-up with EtOAc-Brine. The intermediate 14 wasobtained from ISCO purification (165 mg, 38%) as a black solid.

Boronic acid 12 (27 mg, 0.12 mmol) and 14 (32 mg, 0.1 mmol) weredissolved in 2 mL dioxane and 2 mL MeCN. 0.5 mL of 2M K₃PO₄ was addedand the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before addbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 50 mg, 0.07 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 90° C. for2 h. The reaction mixture was worked-up with EtOAc extraction and theproduct was purified by flash column to afford 15 (4 mg, 9%) as a yellowsolid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₁₉H₁₄F₂N₄OS₂: 416. found: 417 (M+1).

Example 17 Preparation of(2,4,6-trifluorophenyl)-N-[5-[1-ethyl-3-(1,3-thiazol-2-yl)pyrazol-5-yl](2-thienyl)]carboxamide(16)

Boronic acid 12 (27 mg, 0.12 mmol) and 9 (34 mg, 0.1 mmol) weredissolved in 2 mL dioxane and 2 mL MeCN. 0.5 ml of 2M K₃PO₄ was addedand the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before the addition ofbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 50 mg, 0.07 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 90° C. for2 h. The reaction mixture was worked-up with EtOAc extraction and theproduct was purified by flash column to afford 16 (12 mg, 29%) as ayellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₁₉H₁₄F₂N₄OS₂: 434. found: 435 (M+1).

Example 18 Preparation of2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide(20)

To a solution of 3-(2-fluorophenyl)pyrazole (1 g, 6.9 mmol) in THF (50mL) was added NaH (0.66 g, 27.6 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 hand the MeI (1.97 g, 13.8 mmol) was added in one portion. The reactionmixture was stirred for 18 h at room temperature. The reaction wasquenched with MeOH and solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue wastreated with water and EtOAc. The organic layer was separated and theaqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase wasdried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to give crude product. Thecrude product was purified on ISCO columns. Fractions containing pureproduct were combined and evaporated to give3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methylpyrazole (0.53 g, 48%) as a yellow oil.

A solution of 3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methylpyrazole (185 mg, 1.17 mmol) inTHF (5 mL) was cooled to −78° C. followed by the addition of 2.5M n-BuLi(0.7 mL, 1.75 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 4 h at −78° C. and thentrimethyl borate (2 mL, 1.75 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture waswarmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction wasquenched with 1M HCl and stirred for 0.5 h. The mixture was extractedwith EtOAc (20 mL×2). The organic phase was washed with 1M NaOH. Theaqueous was acidified with con. HCl and extracted with EtOAc. Thecombined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, and concentratedto give boronic acid 17 (121.5 mg, 51%) as a yellow solid.

The boronic acid 17 (245 mg, 1.2 mmol) and 2-bromo-5-nitrothiophene (208mg, 1 mmol) were dissolved in 2 mL dioxane and 2 mL MeCN. 2 mL of 2MK₃PO₄ was added and the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before theaddition ofbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 72 mg, 0.1 mmol). The reaction was heated at 90° C. for 2 h. Thereaction mixture was cooled, worked-up with EtOAc extraction and theproduct was purified by flash column to afford 18. Compound 18 wasreduced to amine 19 by hydrogenation with catalyst Pd—C in MeOH.

To a solution of 19 (18 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol) followed by2,4,6-trifluorobenzoyl chloride (20 mg, 0.12 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography to afford 20 (10 mg, 35%) asan orange solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₁H₁₃F₄N₃OS: 431. found: 432 (M+1).

Example 19 Preparation of2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide(21)

To a solution of 19 (18 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol) followed by2,3,6-trifluorobenzoyl chloride (20 mg, 0.12 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography to afford 21 (8.4 mg, 30%)as a yellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₁H₁₃F₄N₃OS: 431. found: 432(M+1).

Example 20 Preparation of2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide(22)

To a solution of 19 (18 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol) followed by2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (18 mg, 0.12 mmol). The mixture was stirredfor 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched with saturatedaqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography and afforded 22 (10.7 mg,39%) as yellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₁H₁₄F₃N₃OS: 413. found: 414(M+1).

Example 21 Preparation of2-fluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-6-methylbenzamide(23)

To a solution of 19 (18 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol) followed by2-fluoro-6-methylbenzoyl chloride (18 mg, 0.12 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography and afforded 23 (7 mg, 26%)as a yellow solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₂H₁₇F₂N₃OS: 410 (M+1).

Example 22 Preparation of2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide(27)

To a solution of 3-(2-pyridyl)pyrazole (291 mg, 2 mmol) in THF (20 mL)was added NaH (0.3 g, 12.5 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h andthe MeI (568 mg, 4 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixturewas stirred for 18 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withMeOH and the solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was treated withwater and EtOAc. The organic layer was separated and the aqueous layerwas extracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered, and concentrated to give crude product. The crudeproduct was purified on ISCO columns. Fractions containing pure productwere combined and evaporated to give 3-(2-pyridyl)-1-methylpyrazole (300mg, 94%) as a yellow oil.

A solution of 3-(2-pyridyl)-1-methylpyrazole (300 mg, 1.88 mmol) in THF(10 mL) was cooled to −78° C. followed by addition of 2.5M n-BuLi (1.4mL, 3.5 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 4 h at −78° C. and trimethylborate (4 mL, 3.5 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was warmed toroom temperature and stirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with1M HCl and stirred for 0.5 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20mL×2). The aqueous solution containing the boronic acid product wasconcentrated and the residue was washed with MeOH. The combined methanolsolution was concentrated to give boronic acid 24 as a yellow solid(mixed with salt).

The boronic acid 24 and 2-bromo-5-nitrothiophene (208 mg, 1 mmol) weredissolved in 2 mL dioxane and 2 mL MeCN. 2 mL of 2M K₃PO₄ was added andthe mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before addition ofbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)-phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 72 mg, 0.1 mmol). The reaction was heated at 90° C. for 2 h. Thereaction mixture was cooled, worked-up with EtOAc extraction and theproduct was purified by flash column to afford 25. Compound 25 wasreduced to amine 26 (45 mg, 8%) by hydrogenation with catalyst Pd—C inMeOH.

To a solution of 26 (15 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol) followed by2,4,6-trifluorobenzoyl chloride (20 mg, 0.12 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withsaturated aqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography to afford 27 (15.6 mg, 64%)as a white solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₀H₁₃F₃N₄OS: 414. found: 415 (M+1).

Example 23 Preparation of2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide(28)

To a solution of 26 (15 mg, 0.06 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ was addedN,N-diisopropylethylamine (DIEA, 26 mg, 36 μL, 0.2 mmol) and4-dimethylaminopyridine (DMAP, 0.6 mg, 0.05 mmol) followed by2,6-difluorobenzoyl chloride (18 mg, 0.12 mmol). The mixture was stirredfor 2 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched with saturatedaqueous NaHCO₃ solution (20 mL) and extracted with EtOAc. Thedicarboxamide was hydrolyzed with 1M NaOH in THF and MeOH (1:1). Theproduct was purified by ISCO chromatography to afford 28 (12.9 mg, 56%)as a white solid. LC-MS: calcd. for C₂₀H₁₄F₂N₄OS: 396. found: 397 (M+1).

Example 24 Preparation of(2,6-difluorophenyl)-N-[5-(3-(1,3-thiazol-2-yl)-1-vinylpyrazol-5-yl](2-thienyl)]carboxamide(5)

To a solution of 1 (0.6 g, 4 mmol) in THF (50 mL) was added NaH (0.72 g,30 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 1 h and the 1,2-dibromoethane(2.25 g, 12 mmol) was added in one potion. The reaction mixture wasstirred for 18 h at room temperature. The reaction was quenched withMeOH and solvent was removed in vacuo. The residue was treated withwater and EtOAc. The organic layer was separated and aqueous wasextracted with EtOAc. The combined organic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄,filtered, concentrated to give crude product. The crude product waspurified on ISCO columns. Fractions containing pure product werecombined and evaporated. The yellow oil 2 (0.55 g, 77%) was obtained.

A solution of 2 (550 mg, 3.1 mmol) in THF (10 ml) was cooled at −78° C.followed by adding 2.5 M n-BuLi (2.5 mL, 6.2 mmol). The mixture wasstirred for 4 h at −78° C. and the trimethyl borate (0.7 mL, 6.2 mmol)was added. The reaction mixture was warmed up to room temperature andstirred overnight. The reaction was quenched with 1M HCl and stirred for0.5 h. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×2). The combinedorganic phase was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, concentrated to giveboronic acid 3 (687 mg, 100%) as yellow solid.

The bronic acid 3 (44 mg, 0.2 mmol) and 4 (32 mg, 0.1 mmol) wasdissolved in 1 mL dioxane and 1 mL MeCN. The 0.5 ml of 2 M K₃PO₄ wasadded and the mixture was bubbled with Ar for 1 min before addbis(di-tert-butyl(4-dimethylaminophenyl)phosphine)dichloropalladium(II)(Aphos, 21 mg, 0.03 mmol). The reaction was heated at 90° C. for 2 h.The reaction mixture was worked-up with EtOAc extraction and product waspurified by HPLC and afforded 5 (2.8 mg, 7%) as yellow solid.

Biological Examples Example 25 In Vitro Screening for Agents thatModulate Intracellular Calcium Levels

Fluorescence-based assays are used for screening the compounds describedherein, such as compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)which modulate intracellular calcium.

A. Fluorescence-Based Assay of Store-Operated Calcium Entry inOrai1/STIM1 Stable Cells.

Cells:

Cells stably expressing recombinant human STIM1 and Orai1 are generatedby transfecting a human Orai1 expression plasmid (pcDNA3.1-Orai1-cmyc)into HEK-293 cells stably overexpressing human STIM1 (Roos et al. 2005JCB 169(3): 435-445). Colonies of cells stably expressing both STIM1 andOrai1 proteins are selected and then subcloned by limiting dilution.Cells were cultured at 37° C./6% CO₂ in complete medium with 10% FBS andappropriate selection markers.

Assay

The day prior to performing the assay Orai1/STIM1 stable cells areplated in 50 μL of complete medium at 90-95% confluence in a 384 wellplate. Cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO₂ overnight. On the day of theassay, 1.5 μM fluo-4-AM (Invitrogen) in complete medium is added to thecells, which are then incubated for 1 hour at RT. Cells are washed oncein Ca²⁺-free HBSS (Hank's buffered saline solution) and 35 μl ofCa²⁺-free HBSS is added to each well. Test compounds are added to wellsin a 10 μL Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution, prepared at 4.5× the desired finalconcentration, and incubated for 30 minutes at RT. The initial baselinefluorescence signal is then measured with a FLIPR³⁸⁴ (Molecular Devices)plate reader. Calcium entry is initiated by adding 5 μl of 10×CaCl₂ (10mM) in HBSS, and changes in cellular fluorescence are measured with theFLIPR³⁸⁴ plate reader. In each well, the magnitude of the fluorescencesignal as a result of calcium entry into the cell is determined bycalculating the difference between the peak fluorescence signal measuredafter calcium addition and the initial baseline fluorescence signal(designated Peak-Basal). IC₅₀ values are typically calculated as theconcentration that inhibited 50% of the Peak-Basal signal.

B. Fluorescence-Based Assay of Store-Operated Calcium Entry in RBL-2H3Cells.

Cells.

RBL-2H3 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in complete mediumwith 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO₂.

Assay:

The day prior to performing the assay, RBL-2H3 cells are plated in 50 μlof complete medium in a 384 well plate. Cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO₂overnight and grow to 50-60% confluence by the next day. On the assayday, 1.5 μM Fluo-4-AM dye (Invitrogen) in complete medium is added andincubated for 1 hour at RT. Cells are washed twice in Ca²⁺-free HBSSbuffer and 35 μL Ca²⁺-free HBSS buffer is added to each well. 10 μL of atest compound prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 4.5× of thedesired concentration is added to a well and incubated for 5 minutes atRT. 10 μL of thapsigargin prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 5.5×of the desired concentration (5.5 uM) is added to each well andincubated for an additional 25 minutes. The initial baselinefluorescence signal is measured with a FLIPR³⁸⁴ (Molecular Devices)plate reader. 5 μL of 12× calcium in HBSS (12 mM) is added and changesin cellular fluorescence are measured with the FLIPR³⁸⁴ plate reader. Ineach well, the change in the fluorescent signal as a function of timedue to calcium entry into the cell is determined by calculating thedifference between the fluorescent signal measured 7 seconds aftercalcium addition and the initial baseline fluorescence signal at timezero (t=0). This parameter is designated Upslope. The IC₅₀ value iscalculated as the concentration at which 50% of the Upslope isinhibited.

The IC₅₀ (μmol) values for the compounds disclosed herein is shown belowin Table iii-v.

TABLE III Orail/STIM1 RBL-2H3 Compound (IC₅₀, μmol) (IC₅₀, μmol) 14 A A15 A A 16 A A 17 A A 19 A A 21 A A 24 A A 25 A A IC₅₀ (mmol) A < 0.6μmol; 0.6 μmol ≦ B ≦ 1.2 μmol; C > 1.2 μmol; — = no fit

TABLE IV Orail/STIM1 RBL-2H3 Compound (IC₅₀, μmol) (IC₅₀, μmol) 6 A A 7A A 10 A A 15 B A 16 B A 20 A A 21 B B 22 A A 23 B A 27 B A 28 A A IC₅₀(mmol) A < 0.6 μmol; 0.6 μmol ≦ B ≦ 1.2 μmol; C > 1.2 μmol; — = no fit

TABLE v Mass IC₅₀ (nM) Com # Structure Formula Cal Found JR251 RBL IL-25

C19H12F2N4OS2 414 415 1208 106

C. Fluorescence-Based Assay of Store-Operated Calcium Entry in JurkatCells.

Cells:

Jurkat E6-1 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in completemedium with 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO₂.

Assay:

The day prior to performing the assay, Jurkat E6-1 cells are seeded at adensity of 2 million cells/mL in complete medium in a T-175 flask. Cellsare grown at 37° C./6% CO₂ overnight. On the following day, 1.5 μMFluo-4-AM dye (Invitrogen) in complete medium is added and incubated for1 hour at RT. Cells are harvested, washed twice in Ca²⁺-free HBSS bufferand plated in 35 μL Ca²⁺-free HBSS buffer in a 384 well plate. 10 μL ofa test compound prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 4.5× of thedesired concentration is added to a well and incubated for 5 minutes atRT. 10 μL of thapsigargin prepared in a Ca²⁺-free HBSS solution at 5.5×of the desired concentration (5.5 uM) is added to each well andincubated for an additional 25 minutes. The initial baselinefluorescence signal is measured with a FLIPR³⁸⁴ (Molecular Devices)plate reader. 5 μL of 12× calcium in HBSS (12 mM) is added and changesin cellular fluorescence are measured with the FLIPR³⁸⁴ plate reader. Ineach well, the change in the fluorescent signal as a function of timedue to calcium entry into the cell is determined by calculating thedifference between the fluorescent signal measured 7 seconds aftercalcium addition and the initial baseline fluorescence signal at timezero (t=0). This parameter is designated Upslope. The IC₅₀ value iscalculated as the concentration at which 50% of the Upslope isinhibited.

Example 26 In Vitro I_(CRAC) Patch Clamp Assay Objective

The objective of this assay is to examine the in vitro effects of testcompounds on cloned CRAC channels (Orai1 and STIM1 genes stablyexpressed in HEK293 cells), responsible for I_(CRAC), the calciumrelease activated calcium channel current.

Test and Control Articles

Formulation: Test article stock solutions are prepared in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and stored frozen. Test article concentrations areprepared fresh daily by diluting stock solutions into an appropriateexternal recording buffer. If necessary, test article formulations aresonicated (Model 2510, Branson Ultrasonics, Danbury, Conn.), at ambientroom temperature to facilitate dissolution. In certain instances, thetest solutions contain up to 0.1% DMSO and the presence of 0.1% DMSOdoes not affect channel current.

Test Article Concentrations and Quantity

Typically, the effects of three (3) concentrations of each test articleare evaluated (0.1, 1, and 10 μM). Test articles are weighed andprepared as 30 mM or 10 mM stock solutions in DMSO. The DMSO stock isdiluted in external recording buffer to prepare a 10 μM test solution(final DMSO 0.03% or 0.1%). The 10 μM test solution is diluted inexternal recording buffer to prepare 1 μM and 0.1 μM test solutions.Test solutions contain up to 0.1% DMSO at the highest concentrationwhich are diluted in test solutions at lower concentrations.

Positive Control Article

Stock solutions of the positive control article are prepared in batches,aliquoted for individual use, stored frozen and used within six months.The positive control concentration is prepared fresh daily by dilutingstock solutions into external recording buffer. The final DMSOconcentration in the test positive control article is up to 0.1% of thesolution.

Negative Control Article

The negative control article is 0.1% DMSO in external recording buffer.

Cloned Ion Channel Test Systems

Cells are maintained in tissue culture incubators per CalciMedicastandard protocols. Stocks are maintained in cryogenic storage. Cellsused for electrophysiology are plated in plastic tissue culture dishes.

HEK293 Cells

HEK293 cells are stably transfected with the appropriate ion channelcDNAs (Orai1/STIM1). Cells are cultured in DMEM (Gibco 11960)supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (Gibco 10082), 100 U/mLpenicillin G sodium, 1 mM Na pyruvate (Gibco 11360), 100 μg/mLstreptomycin sulfate (Gibco 10378), 0.5 mg/ml geneticin (Gibco10131-035) and 50 μg/ml zeocin (Invitrogen 45-0430). Cells should bemaintained at ≦80% confluence. The day before testing, cells in culturedishes are washed once with calcium/magnesium-free D-PBS, treated withtrypsin/EDTA and re-suspended in the culture media and counted. Cellsare then diluted in culture medium with 1% fetal bovine serum and platedat low density (5-10K) onto poly-D-lysine coated glass coverslips in24-well tissue culture dishes and placed in a tissue culture incubatorset at 37° C. in a humidified 95% air, 6% CO₂ atmosphere.

Test Methods

Recording Chamber and Perfusion of Test Articles

Glass coverslips containing cells are transferred to a recording chamber(Warner Instruments) with continuous perfusion of external recordingbuffer. During recordings of I_(CRAC), all treatments are delivered bygravity-fed bath perfusion from disposable syringe reservoirs viadisposable polyethylene tubing feeding into a Teflon manifold. The flowrate is set between 1.2-1.5 ml/min assuring complete solution exchangein ˜1 min. All experiments are performed at ambient temperature.

Test Article Treatment Groups

For experiments where the test article is applied for 10 minutes thetreatment paradigm is summarized in Table 1. Control recording buffer isperfused for five (5) minutes while I_(CRAC) develops and a stablebaseline is established; each cell is used as its own control. Each testarticle is applied to naïve cells (n≧2, where n=the numbercells/concentration; at 1 concentration/cell) for a duration of ten (10)minutes (Table 1). The test article is washed off for ten (10) minutesto look for reversibility of the effect. External recording saline withno calcium is perfused for two (2) minutes to determine the backgroundcurrent in the absence of I_(CRAC) Control saline containing calcium isreapplied for three (3) minutes.

For experiments where the test article is applied for 30 minutes priorto recording of I_(CRAC), the treatment paradigm is summarized in Table2. Prior to the start of each experiment, cells are incubated withcompound for 30 minutes at room temperature, and compound remainspresent throughout I_(CRAC) recordings. Control cells are exposed tovehicle only. After break-in and establishment of the whole-cell patchclamp configuration, recording buffer±compound is perfused for ten (10)minutes. At the end of the 10 min period the amplitude of I_(CRAC) ismeasured. The effects of compounds are determined by comparing theI_(CRAC) signal in cells pretreated with compound to the signal in cellspretreated with vehicle.

TABLE 1 Test Article Schedule for 10-minute Application Studies EpochSolution Exposure time 1 Baseline control/stabilization 5 minutes 2 Testarticle 10 minutes  3 Wash 10 minutes  4 0 calcium 2 minutes 5 control 3minutes

TABLE 2 Test Article Schedule for 40-minute Application Studies EpochSolution Exposure time Test article 30 minutes 1 Test article 10 minutes2 Wash 10 minutes 3 0 calcium  2 minutes 4 control  3 minutes

Control Treatment Groups

As a negative control, 0.1% DMSO is applied to naïve cells (n≧2, wheren=the number cells. This is used to monitor the magnitude of rundown ofI_(CRAC). As a positive control, 1 μM of4-(4-bromophenyl)-2-(3-fluorobenzamido)thiophene-3-carboxylic acid isroutinely applied to naïve cells (n≧2, where n=the number cells).

Whole Cell Patch Clamp Procedures

Standard whole cell patch clamp procedures are used. The compositions ofthe extracellular and intracellular solutions are shown in Tables 3 and4. Cells are visualized on an inverted microscope (Olympus IX71) andvoltage clamped using a Multiclamp 700B amplifier and PClamp software(Axon Instruments). Briefly, borosilicate patch pipettes filled withintracellular solution (Appendix 1) are positioned onto the cellmembrane. Once a GΩ seal is formed, suction is applied until the patchruptures and the whole cell configuration is established. The quality ofthe configuration will be evaluated with the “membrane test” in Clampexto determine cell capacitance (Cm), input resistance (Rm), accessresistance (Ra), and holding current at −50 mV (Ih). Data are stored onthe CalciMedica computer network (and backed-up nightly) for off-lineanalysis.

TABLE 3 Extracellular Solution Composition (concentration in mM) NaCl120 TEA-Cl 10 HEPES 10 CaCl2 10 (and 0) MgCl2 2 (and 12) glucose 10

The pH is adjusted to 7.2 with NaOH and the final osmolarity is adjustedto 325 with sucrose. Solutions are prepared daily. Chemicals used insolution preparation are purchased from Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.),unless otherwise noted, and are of ACS reagent grade purity or higher.

TABLE 4 Intracellular Solution Composition (concentration in mM)Cs-glutamate 120 HEPES 10 BAPTA 20 MgCl2 3

The pH is adjusted to 7.2 with CsOH. Solutions are prepared in batches,aliquoted, and refrigerated until use. A fresh aliquot is used each dayand stored on ice throughout the day. Chemicals used in solutionpreparation are purchased from Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), unlessotherwise noted, and are of ACS reagent grade.

I_(CRAC) Test Procedures

I_(CRAC) from the Orai1/STIM1 channel complex is activated by passivedepletion of intracellular calcium stores using 20 mM BAPTA in theintracellular solution. Voltage clamp data is acquired using Clampexsoftware to elicit a stimulus voltage protocol (shown in Table 5)applied every six (6) seconds. Currents are digitized at 10 kHz andfiltered at 2 kHz. Whole cell capacitive compensation is employed.Representative I_(CRAC) traces are shown in FIG. 2.

TABLE 5 Voltage Clamp Protocol Voltage Description Vh +30 mV to minimizecalcium entry in-between sweeps Vstep to 0 mV for 10 ms to evaluate“zero” current Vstep to −100 mV for 10 ms to measure I_(CRAC) at highdriving force Vramp to +100 mV over 50 ms to monitor inwardly rectifyingprofile of I_(CRAC) Vstep to +50 mV for 10 ms to estimate leak current

Data Analysis

Data analysis is performed using Clampfit software. I_(CRAC) is measuredat −100 mV and the current measured after 5 min is used as the baselinecontrol. For 10-minute application studies, the current measured after10 min application of the test article is normalized to the baselinecurrent and expressed as % control. For 40-min application studies, thecurrent measured at the end of 10 minutes of I_(CRAC) recording time isused as the comparator. The current measured in “0 calcium” buffer isused to subtract background leak current. Data points for each testarticle concentration (n≧2) are fitted to a sigmoid function (SigmaPlot)to determine the IC₅₀ and Hill slope.

Example 27 In Vitro Assay of Mast Cell Degranulation

Cells:

RBL-2H3 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in complete mediumwith 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO2.

Assay:

a) Stimulation with 1 μM Thapsigargin/20 nM TPA

The day prior to performing the assay, RBL-2H3 cells are plated in a 96well plate. Cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO2 overnight. On the followingday, cells are washed twice in HBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2 and 1.75%fetal bovine serum (FBS). 70 μL of a test compound prepared in HBSSBuffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2+1.75% FBS is added and incubated for 10 minutesat 37° C./6% CO2. Cells are stimulated by the addition of 7 μl of 11×thapsigargin/TPA (11 μM thapsigargin/220 nM TPA) and incubated at 37°C./6% CO2 for 120 minutes. Media is collected and cell lysates areprepared by the addition of 70 μL of 0.05% Triton X-100 in HBSS with 1.8mM CaCl2. Levels of β-hexosaminidase are measured in both the media andthe cell lysates. The β-hexosaminidase assay is performed by adding 40μl of 1 mM p-nitrophenyl-acetyl-glucosamide substrate in 0.05M sodiumcitrate (pH 4.5) to 10 μl of sample (conditioned medium or cell lysate),incubating 60 minutes at 37° C., then adding 100 μL 0.05M sodiumcarbonate/0.05M sodium bicarbonate (pH 10.5), mixing thoroughly andreading the absorbance at 405 nm. The percentage of β-hexosaminidasereleased is calculated as follows: A405 (media)/[A405 (media)+A405(lysate)]. The IC₅₀ value is calculated as the concentration at which50% of the β-hexosaminidase released in vehicle treated cells isinhibited.

b) Stimulation with IgE-DNP

The day prior to performing the assay, RBL-2H3 cells are plated in 200μL of complete medium in a 96 well plate for 1 hour. 20 μL of 11×DNP-IgEare added and cells are grown at 37° C./6% CO2 overnight. On thefollowing day, cells are washed twice in HBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2and 1.75% fetal bovine serum (FBS). 70 μL of a test compound prepared inHBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl2 and 1.75% is added and incubated for 10minutes at 37° C./6% CO₂. Cells are stimulated by the addition of 7 μLof 11×DNP-BSA and incubated at 37° C./6% CO2 for 30 minutes. Media iscollected and cell lysates are prepared by the addition of 70 ul of0.05% Triton X-100 in HBSS with 1.8 mM CaCl₂. Levels of β-hexosaminidaseare measured in both the media and the cell lysates. Theβ-hexosaminidase assay is performed by adding 40 μL of 1 mMp-nitrophenyl-acetyl-glucosamide substrate in 0.05M sodium citrate (pH4.5) to 10 μL of sample (conditioned medium or cell lysate), incubating60 minutes at 37° C., then adding 100 μL 0.05M sodium carbonate/0.05Msodium bicarbonate (pH 10.5), mixing thoroughly and reading theabsorbance at 405 nm. The percentage of β-hexosaminidase released iscalculated as follows: A405 (media)/[A405 (media)+A405 (lysate)]. TheIC₅₀ value is calculated as the concentration at which 50% of theβ-hexosaminidase released in vehicle treated cells is inhibited.

Example 28 In Vitro Assay of Cytokine Release from T Cells Cells:

Jurkat E6-1 cells are obtained from ATCC and maintained in completemedium with 10% FBS at 37° C./6% CO2.

Assay:

The day prior to performing the assay, Jurkat T cells are plated in 90μL of HBSS Buffer with 1.8 mM CaCl₂ and 1.75% fetal bovine serum (FBS)in a 96 well plate at a density of 1.5×105 cells/well for 3 hours. 10 μLof 10× test compound prepared in HBSS is added and incubated for 10minutes at 37° C./6% CO2. Cells are stimulated by the addition of 10 μLof 11×PHA/TPA (27.5 μg/mL PHA/880 nM TPA) and incubated at 37° C./6% CO₂for 20 hours. On the following day, the supernatants are collected andassayed for IL-2 levels by ELISA according to the manufacturer'sprotocols. The IC₅₀ value is calculated as the concentration at which50% of secreted IL-2 in vehicle treated cells is inhibited.

Example 29 Dose-Response Effects of a Compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V), CSA or Rapamycin in Mouse Footpad DTH

Purpose: Determine dose-response effects of Test Compound on mBSAinduced DTH response in foot pads when dosing is done during thesensitization as well as induction phase.

Animals: Male Swiss Webster Mice approx. 20-25 grams at start of study.

Materials: Methylated BSA (Sigma) Freund's complete adjuvant (Difco)plus supplemental M. tuberculosis H37 RA (Difco).

General Study Design:

Mice are anesthetized with Isoflurane and given intradermal antigeninjections of 0.1 ml at the base of the tail (D0, D07). Antigen isprepared by making a 4 mg/ml solution in sterile water. Equal volumes ofantigen and Freund's complete adjuvant to which 4 mg/ml MTB are added(sonicate for 5 minutes after adding MTB to oil), are emulsified by handmixing until a bead of this material holds its form when placed inwater. Treatment with test compound is initiated on day 0, qd (24 hrintervals) and continued through day 10 when challenge is done.

On day 10 animals are injected into the right hind footpad with 20 μl of10 mg/ml mBSA. Five unsensitized males are injected with mBSA into thefootpad. Twenty-four hours later (day 11) the right and left hind pawsare transected at the medial and lateral malleolus and weighed and theweight difference induced by injection of antigen is determined.

Statistical Analysis. Paw weights (mean±SE) for each group are analyzedfor differences using a Student's t test or ANOVA with Dunnett's posttest. Statistical significance is set at p≦0.05.

TABLE 6 Treatment Groups Males Group N Treatment 10 ml/kg qd, po 1 5Normal controls (no sensitization) Inject mBSA into right only 2 8 DTH +Vehicle (70% PEG400/30% Water) 3 8 DTH + Test Compound (50 mg/kg, po,qd) 4 8 DTH + Test Compound (100 mg/kg, po, qd) 5 8 DTH + Test Compound(200 mg/kg, po, qd) 6 8 DTH + Test Compound (300 mg/kg, po, qd) 7 8DTH + CSA (100 mg/kg qd, ip) 8 8 DTH + Rapamycin (5 mg/kg qd, ip)

Compounds of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) are expected to beeffective in this model.

Example 30 Pharmacokinetic Data of a Compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) in Rats

The bioavailability and plasma pharmacokinetic properties in rats ofCompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) administered orallyin 25% PEG400/20% ethanol/55% H₂O vehicle. Two treatment groups, 1) ani.v. dose group at 2 mg/kg; and 2) an oral dose group at 10 mg/kg areadministered to Male Sprague-Dawley rats (3 rats per group), weighingapproximately 250-300 gm. Up to 10 time points are collected for eachgroup. Typical time points are: predose, 15, 30 minutes, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8,12 and 24 hrs. Up to 300 μL of whole blood are collected via jugularvein cannula at each time point. Whole blood is collected intoanticoagulant containing microcentrifuge tubes and centrifuged at 5000rpm in a microcentrifuge for 5 minutes before plasma is transferred to aclean microcentrifuge tube. The plasma samples undergo bioanalyticalanalysis.

Example 31 Effect of Test Compound in Rat Collagen Induced Arthritis(CIA) Model

Purpose: Determine efficacy of Test Compound administered by oral dosingqd, in inhibiting the inflammation, cartilage destruction and boneresorption of developing type II collagen arthritis in rats.

Animals:

Female Lewis rats (Charles River#7246950), weighing 125-150 g at thestart of the study. 40 rats are injected with collagen to get solidresponders on days 10 and 11. Four nonimmunized animals serve as normalcontrols.

Materials:

Test Compound, Type II collagen, Freund's incomplete adjuvant, aceticacid. Test Compound is prepared at a concentration of 10 mg/ml in 50%PEG400/50% water. Collagen is prepared by making a 4 mg/ml solution in0.01N Acetic acid. Equal volumes of collagen and Freund's incompleteadjuvant, are emulsified by hand mixing until a bead of this materialholds its form when placed in water.

General Study Design:

Animals (10 rats/group for arthritis, 4 rats/group for normal control).

Animals in the arthritis groups are anesthetized with isoflurane andgiven collagen injections (D0); each animal gets 300 μl of the mixturespread over 3 subcutaneous sites on the back. On Day 6 (D6) the animalsare anesthetized again and given a second collagen injection, as before.

Oral dosing of Test Compound at 24 hour intervals (qd) is initiated onDay 0 using a dose volume of 5 ml/kg for oral solutions. Rats areweighed on Days 0, 3, 6, and 9-17 of arthritis, and caliper measurementsof ankles taken every day beginning on Day 9. Final body weights aretaken on Day 17 of arthritis. On Day 17, all animals are anesthetizedfor terminal blood draw and then euthanized. Subsequently, hind paws andknees are removed, the hind paws are weighed and then (with knees)placed in formalin for processing for microscopy. Livers, spleen andthymus and kidneys are also removed, trimmed of extraneous tissue andweighed. Kidneys are retained in formalin for histopathology.

Sampling will occur over 1 day and involves groups 2-5 with samplesretained from all groups. This results in all animals being treatedsimilarly and is important for clinical parameters and final liverweights.

Example 32 Effect of Compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)on DNBS-Induced Colitis in Rats

Procedure: Male Wistar rats weighing 200±20 g are fasted for 24 hoursprior to use. Distal colitis is induced by intra-colonic instillation ofDNBS (2,4-dinotrobenzene sulfonic acid, 20 mg in 0.5 ml ethanol 30%)with a catheter of 12 cm in length, followed by gentle injection of air(2 ml) through the catheter to ensure that the solution remain in thecolon. The animals are divided into groups of 5 each. Test substance andvehicle are administered either daily or twice daily by appropriateroute of administration 24 hour and 1 hour before DNBS instillation andthen for 6 consecutive days thereafter. One normal control group istreated with 0.9% NaCl alone without DNBS challenge. The animals aresacrificed 12 hours after the final bid dose and 24 hours after thefinal daily dose and the colon is removed and weighed. During theexperiment, body weight, fecal occult blood and stool consistency aremonitored daily. Furthermore, when the abdominal cavity is opened beforeremoval of the colon, adhesions between the colon and other organs arenoted as is the presence of colonic ulceration after removal andweighing of each colon (a macroscopic damage score is recorded accordingto established score criteria). The colon-to-body weight ratio iscalculated according to the formula: Colon (g)/BW×100. The “Net”increase in ratio of Vehicle-control+DNBS group relative toVehicle-control group is used as a base for comparison with individualtreated groups and expressed as “Dec. (%)” (percent decrease). A 30% ormore (≧30%) reduction in colon-to-body weight ratio, relative to thevehicle treated control group, is considered significant.

Sulfasalazine is used as the standard test agent. (Hogaboam C M, et al.,An orally active non-selective endothelin receptor antagonist, bosentan,markedly reduces injury in a rat model of colitis. Eur J Pharmacol. 309:261-269, 1996; Yue G, et al., In some embodiments, the 21-aminosteroidtirilazid mesylate ameliorates inflammatory bowel disease in rats. JPharmacol Exp Ther. 276: 265-270, 1996.)

Compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) are expected to reducecolitis in this model.

Example 33 Effect of Compounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)on Rejection of Skin Transplants in Rats

Procedure. Specific pathogen free Lewis and Brown Norway rats 10 weeksof age are purchased from Charles River and housed under cleanconventional conditions. The animals are handled and allowed toacclimatize for a period of two weeks. Skin donors: female Brown Norwayrats, 10 weeks of age. Skin recipients: female Lewis rats, 10 weeks ofage.

The donor Brown Norway rats are killed to serve as donors of 5 to 8 skintransplants. Directly after killing the Brown Norway rats, the abdominalskin of the rats is shaved and skin transplants of 20 mm in diameter insize are taken. After removal of connective tissue, these grafts aretransplanted onto Lewis rats. This is performed by shaving the upperdorsal skin of the Lewis rat under isoflurane anesthesia, removing apiece of skin of 15 mm in diameter by punching and replacement with askin transplant derived from the Brown Norway rat.

During the study each graft is fixated by 4-6 stitches using Safil 6/0violet (B Braun, Aesculap) and covered by Paraffin Gauze Dressing BP(3×3 cm, Smith & Nephew), a piece of gauze and surgical tape. Thisadaptation minimizes the chance of loosing a transplant for reasonsdifferent from rejection.

In all cases, transplants are protected with a bandage; these areremoved after six days to enable daily inspection of the transplant.

Rejection is monitored by evaluating first signs of inflammation(redness) and necrosis (hardening and blackening of the graft).

Example 34 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) in Patients withActive Rheumatoid Arthritis

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,tolerability, PK, PD, and efficacy of single and repeat intravenousinfusions of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) inpatients with active rheumatoid arthritis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women between the ages of 18 and 75

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   All subjects must use acceptable contraception to ensure that no        pregnancies occur during the course of the study and for at        least 12 weeks after dosing for males and for 32 weeks after        dosing for females;    -   Body mass index within the range 18.5-35 kg/m² inclusive, in        addition to a weight range of 55-95 kg;    -   The subject must be capable of giving informed consent and can        comply with the study requirements and timetable;    -   The subject must have a diagnosis of RA according to the revised        1987 criteria of the American College of Rheumatology (ACR);    -   The subject must have a DAS28 disease activity score of greater        than 4.2 at screening and pre-dose;    -   The subject must have a CRP serum level of >/0.5 mg/dl or an ESR        level 28 mm/hour at screening and pre-dose;    -   The subject has NOT received any biological therapy in the past,        including biologicals for the treatment of rheumatoid arthritis;    -   The subject must have liver function tests including alanine        transaminase (ALT) and aspartate transaminase (AST) within 1.5        times the upper limit of normal (ULN) and alkaline phosphatase        (ALP) within 3 times ULN at screening. The patient must also        have total bilirubin within the ULN at screening;    -   The subject must have received at least 3 months of methotrexate        and must be on a stable dose of methotrexate (up to 25 mg/week)        for at least 8 weeks prior to screening and be willing to remain        on this dose throughout the study;    -   If sulfasalazine is being taken in addition to methotrexate, the        subject must be on a stable dose for at least 4 weeks prior to        screening and be willing to remain on this dose throughout the        study;    -   If hydroxychloroquine or chloroquine is being taken in addition        to methotrexate, the subject must be on a stable dose for at        least 3 months prior to screening and be willing to remain on        this dose throughout the study;    -   Those subjects on other oral anti-rheumatic therapies, which may        include Non Steroidal Anti Inflammatory Drugs (NSAIDs), COX-2        inhibitors, oral glucocorticoids e.g. prednisolone (˜10 mg/day)        must be on stable dosing regimens for at least 4 weeks prior to        screening and be willing to remain on this regime throughout the        study. Subjects receiving intramuscular glucocorticoids e.g        methylprednisolone (˜120 mg/month) must be on a stable dosing        regimen for at least 3 months prior to screening and be willing        to remain on this regimen throughout the study;    -   The subject must be on a stable dose of folate supplements (5        mg/week) for at least 4 weeks prior.

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Any clinically relevant abnormality identified on the screening        medical assessment, laboratory examination (e.g. haematology        parameter outside the normal limits), or ECG (12 Lead or        Holter);    -   The subject has a positive Hepatitis B surface antigen or        Hepatitis C antibody result at screening;    -   The subject has a history of elevated liver function tests on        more than one occasion (ALT, AST and ALP>3× —Upper Limit of        Normal (ULN); total bilirubin>1.5×ULN) in the past 6 months;    -   Previous exposure or past infection caused by Mycobacterium        tuberculosis;    -   The subject has an acute infection;    -   The subject has a history of repeated, chronic or opportunistic        infections that, in the opinion of the investigator and/or GSK        medical monitor, places the subject at an unacceptable risk as a        participant in this trial;    -   The subject has a history of malignancy, except for surgically        cured basal cell carcinoma or females with cured cervical        carcinoma (>2 yrs prior);    -   The subject has a history of human immunodeficiency virus (HIV)        or other immunodeficiency disease;    -   The subject whose calculated creatinine clearance is less than        50 ml/min;    -   The subject has significant cardiac, pulmonary, metabolic,        renal, hepatic or gastrointestinal conditions that, in the        opinion of the investigator and/or GSK medical monitor, places        the subject at an unacceptable risk as a participant in this        trial;    -   The subject has taken cyclosporine, leflonomide, cyclophophamide        or azathioprine within 1 month of screening. Subjects that have        taken cyclosporine, leflonomide, cyclophophamide or azathioprine        in the past must have recovered from all drug related adverse        events;    -   The subject has taken gold salts or d-penicillamine within 1        month prior to screening. Subjects that have taken gold salts or        d-penicillamine in the past must have recovered from all drug        related adverse events;    -   The subject has received intra-articular glucocorticoids within        1 month of screening;    -   Recent history of bleeding disorders, anaemia, peptic ulcer        disease, haematemesis or gastrointestinal bleeding;    -   Subjects with a history of haematological disease or acquired        platelet disorders, including drug-induced thrombocytopaenia,        acute idiopathic thrombocytopaenia or von Willebrand's disease;    -   Subjects with a known risk of intra-cranial haemorrhage        including Central Nervous System (CNS) surgery within the last        12 months, arterial vascular malformations, aneurysms,        significant closed head trauma within 6 months or any other        incident the investigator and/or medical monitor considers to be        relevant;    -   The subject has Hb<10 g/deciliter (dL) and platelet count        <150×109/Liter (L);    -   Donation of blood in excess of 500 ml within a 56 day period        prior to dosing;    -   An unwillingness of male subjects to abstain from sexual        intercourse with pregnant or lactating women; or an        unwillingness of the male subject to use a condom with        spermicide in addition to having their female partner use        another form of contraception such as an interuterine device        (IUD), diaphragm with spermicide, oral contraceptives,        injectable progesterone, subdermal implants of levonorgestrel or        a tubal ligation if the woman could become pregnant for at least        12 weeks after dosing;    -   An unwillingness of female subject of child bearing potential to        use adequate contraception, as defined in the study restriction        section. If necessary, women of non-child bearing potential        (i.e. post-menopausal or surgically sterile e.g. tubal ligation        or hysterectomy or bilateral oophorectomy) will be confirmed.        Postmenopausal status will be confirmed by serum follicle        stimulating hormone (FSH) and oestradiol concentrations at        screening. Surgical sterility will be defined as females who        have had a documented hysterectomy, tubal ligation or bilateral        oophorectomy;    -   The subject has a history of use of drugs of abuse within 12        months prior to screening;    -   History of regular alcohol consumption exceeding average weekly        intake of greater than 21 units or an average daily intake of        greater than 3 units (males) or an average weekly intake of        greater than 14 units or an average daily intake of greater than        2 units (females). Subjects who regularly consume more than 12        units of alcohol in a 24 h period will also be excluded. 1 unit        is equivalent to a half-pint (220 ml) of beer/lager or 1 (25 ml)        measure of spirits or 1 glass (125 ml) of wine;    -   Positive pregnancy test or lactating at screening;    -   Participation in a trial with any investigational drug within 3        months or 5 half-lives (whichever is longer) before.

Study Design:

This is a randomized, double-blinded, placebo-controlled adaptive, dosefinding study to investigate the safety, tolerability, PK, PD andefficacy of single and repeat intravenous infusions of a compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) in patients with activerheumatoid arthritis. The study is divided into 2 parts: Part A is anadaptive, dose finding phase which will provide safety, tolerability, PKand PD on single intravenous infusions. Part B is a repeat dose phasewhich will provide safety, tolerability, PK, PD and efficacy followingrepeat intravenous infusions of a selected dose level.

Primary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Safety and Tolerability following single ascending doses of a        compound of Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) at 1 month and        following 3 repeat doses of a compound of Formulas (I), (II),        (III), (IV) or (V) at 3 months. Clinical Efficacy (DAS28 score)        of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) at 1        month

Secondary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Weighted mean DAS28 after single and repeat intravenous doses    -   Plasma PK parameters of a compound of Formulas (I), (II),        (III), (IV) or (V) after single and repeat intravenous doses        including free, and bound a compound of Formulas (I), (II),        (III), (IV) or (V) (serum) concentrations, AUC_((0-∞)), C_(max),        clearance, volume of distribution and accumulation ratio    -   DAS28 and EULAR response criteria after single and repeat        intravenous doses    -   ACR20/ACR50/ACR70 response after single and repeat intravenous        doses    -   Number of swollen joints assessed using 28-joint counts    -   Number of tender/painful joints assessed using 28-joint counts    -   Subject's pain assessment    -   Physician's global assessment of arthritis condition    -   Patients' global assessment of arthritis condition    -   Functional disability index (Health Assessment Questionnaire)    -   C-reactive Protein (CRP)    -   ESR    -   Global Fatigue Index    -   HAQ disability index    -   Pharmacodynamic biomarkers after single and repeat intravenous        doses    -   Characteristic AUC₅₀ and EC₅₀ for clinical endpoint changes with        plasma exposure model, as assessed by sigmoid E_(max) and        indirect response PK/PD models.    -   Immunogenicity (Human anti-compound of Formulas (I), (II),        (III), (IV) or (V) antibodies)

Example 35 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) in Patients withSevere, Recalcitrant, Plaque-Type Psoriasis

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,efficacy, and tolerability of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) in patients with severe, recalcitrant, plaque-typepsoriasis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women between the ages of 18 and 75.

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   The patient has severe, recalcitrant, plaque-type psoriasis and        has failed at least 1 systemic therapy (for the purposes of this        study psoralen with ultraviolet light A is considered to be a        systemic therapy);    -   The patient has psoriatic involvement of at least 10% of BSA;    -   The patient has a PSGA score of 4 or greater;    -   The patient, if a woman, is surgically sterile or 2 years        postmenopausal, or if of childbearing potential is currently        using a medically accepted method of contraception, and agrees        to continue use of this method for the duration of the study        (and for 30 days after participation in the study). Acceptable        methods of contraception include: abstinence, steroidal        contraceptive (oral, transdermal, implanted, or injected) in        conjunction with a barrier method, or intrauterine device (IUD);    -   The patient, if a main, is surgically sterile, or if capable of        producing offspring, is currently using an approved method of        birth control, and agrees to continued use of this method for        the duration of the study (and for 60 days after taking the last        dose of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)        because of the possible effects on spermatogenesis);    -   The patient must be willing and able to comply with study        procedures and restrictions and willing to return to the clinic        for the follow-up evaluation as specified in this protocol.

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   The patient has received treatment with systemic psoriasis        treatments (specifically, retinoids, methotrexate, cyclosporine        A, etanercept, efalizumab, other biological agents or other        immunomodulators) within 4 weeks, or UV based therapy within 2        weeks, or alefacept within 6 weeks of the planned 1st day of        study treatment;    -   The patient has received treatment with potent CYP3A4 inhibitors        including cyclosporine, clotrimazole, fluconazole, itraconazole,        ketoconazole, voriconazole, erythromycin, clarithromycin, and        troleandomycin, human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) protease        inhibitors, or nefazodone within 1 week (7 days) of the planned        1st day of study treatment;    -   The patient is currently receiving warfarin;    -   The patient has hypersensitivity to a compound of Formulas (I),        (II), (III), (IV) or (V) or any component of a compound of        Formula (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V);    -   The patient has one or more of the following serum chemistry        values as determined at the screening visit (visit 1):    -   bilirubin levels greater than 2 times the upper limit of normal        (ULN);    -   ALT or AST levels greater than 2 times the ULN;    -   serum creatinine levels or more than 2 mg/dL;    -   The patient requires current treatment for HIV with protease        inhibitors;    -   The patient is taking medication for a clinical diagnosis of        gastrointestinal ulceration or has experienced melena or        hematoemesis in the previous 3 weeks;    -   The patient is a woman who is pregnant or lactating;    -   The patient has received treatment with an investigation drug        within 4 weeks of the planned 1st day of study treatment.

Study Design:

This is an exploratory, open-label, nonrandomized, dose-escalation studyof the efficacy, safety, and tolerability of a compound of Formulas (I),(II), (III), (IV) or (V) in patients with severe, recalcitrant,plaque-type psoriasis.

Example 36 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) for Prophylaxis ofAcute Rejection after Renal Transplantation

The standard immunosuppressive treatment after renal transplantation isa combination of tacrolimus, mycophenolate mofetil, and prednisolone.With this regimen the incidence of acute rejection within the first sixmonths after transplantation can drop to about 20%. The main challengeat present remains to improve long-term outcome by preventing chronicallograft nephropathy (CAN). Since acute rejection is a strong predictorof CAN, a further decrease in the incidence of acute rejection canimprove the long-term graft survival. The purpose of this phase IIclinical trial is to investigate the effectiveness and safety of acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) for prophylaxis ofacute rejection after renal transplantation.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women ages 18 and older

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   Renal transplant recipients;    -   Signed, dated, and witnessed IRB approved informed consent;

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Pregnancy;    -   Living donor, who is HLA identical;    -   Hemolytic uremic syndrome as original kidney disease;    -   Focal segmental glomerulosclerosis that had recurred in a        previous graft;    -   More than two previously failed grafts and/or PRA>85%;    -   Diabetes mellitus that is currently not treated with insulin;    -   Total white blood cell count <3,000/mm3 or platelet count        <75,000/mm3;    -   Active infection with hepatitis B, hepatitis C, or HIV;    -   History of tuberculosis.

Study Design:

This is a randomized, double blind, placebo controlled interventionstudy on the efficacy and safety of the prophylactic use of a compoundof Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V). One group will receive asingle dose of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)intravenously at the time of transplantation, and the other groupreceives a placebo infusion.

Primary Outcome:

-   -   To determine the incidence and severity of biopsy-confirmed        acute rejection within the first six months after        transplantation

Secondary Outcomes:

-   -   Renal function as estimated by the endogenous creatinine        clearance at 6 months    -   Occurrence of chronic allograft nephropathy at 6 months    -   Cumulative incidence of infections and malignancies at 6 months    -   Medical costs during the first 6 months after transplantation    -   Patient and graft survival

Example 37 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Tolerability of aCompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) in Patients withActive Ulcerative Colitis (UC)

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,tolerability of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)regimen in patients with active ulcerative colitis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women aged 18 and older

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   Active UC on 5-ASA therapy and also treated with 6-MP and/or        corticosteroids or who have previously been treated with AZA,        6-MP or corticosteroids and could not tolerate them;    -   Mayo score of 6 to 10 points with moderate to severe disease on        endoscopy (Mayo score of at least 2) performed ≦14 days of study        drug administration;    -   Subjects on the following medications may be enrolled into the        study if the medications were according to the following        schedules prior to study drug administration and if no changes        are anticipated during the study;        -   prednisolone ≦20 mg daily (or equivalent) (dose must be            stable for at least 2 weeks prior to study drug            administration);        -   5-ASA (dose must be stable for at least 4 weeks prior to            study drug administration);        -   AZA or 6-MP (dose must be stable for at least 3 months prior            to study drug administration);        -   Rectal steroids or 5-ASA (must have been stable for at least            4 weeks prior to study drug);    -   Subjects using rectal medications must have visible disease on        sigmoidoscopy at ≧20 cm;    -   Screening laboratory values must meet certain criteria:        -   Women must be postmenopausal (>12 months without menses) or            surgically sterile (e.g., by hysterectomy and/or bilateral            oophorectomy) or must be using effective contraception            (e.g., oral contraceptives, intrauterine device (IUD),            double barrier method of condom and spermicidal) for at            least 4 weeks prior to study drug administration and agree            to continue contraception for the duration of their            participation in the study; and        -   Sexually active male subjects must use a barrier method of            contraception during the duration of the study

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Anti-TNF therapy within 8 weeks before study drug        administration;    -   Any experimental therapy more therapy ≦4 weeks before study drug        administration;    -   Prior treatment with any monoclonal antibody or        immunoglobulin-based fusion proteins ≦8 weeks prior to study        treatment;    -   Presence of Cushing's syndrome;    -   Toxic megacolon or fulminant disease likely to require        colectomy;    -   Contraindication to colonoscopy or sigmoidoscopy;    -   Primary or secondary immunodeficiency;    -   Autoimmune disease besides UC, with the exceptions of Sjogren's        syndrome or hypothyroidism;    -   History of malignancy, excluding adequately treated and cured        basal or squamous cell of the skin, or cervical carcinoma in        situ;    -   Major psychiatric disease (subjects with stable depression        receiving appropriate management will be permitted in the        study);    -   Evidence of acute or chronic infection as evidenced by:    -   stool culture positive for pathogens and/or Clostridium        difficile toxin;    -   findings on Screening chest radiography such as pulmonary        infiltrate(s) or adenopathy;    -   current treatment for tuberculosis infection, clinical or        radiological evidence of active TB, or for subjects in North        America, a positive PPD without prior prophylaxis;    -   Herpes zoster ≦3 months prior to study drug administration;    -   active infectious disease requiring i.v. antibiotics within 4        weeks prior to study treatment or oral antibiotics at the time        of enrollment;    -   HIV or AIDS;    -   positive tests for HBV, or HCV indicating active or chronic        infection;    -   Clinically significant cardiac disease requiring medication,        unstable angina, myocardial within 6 months, or congestive heart        failure;    -   Arrhythmia requiring active therapy, with the exception of        clinically insignificant or minor conduction abnormalities;    -   History of cerebrovascular disease requiring        medication/treatment;    -   Anticoagulation therapy or a known bleeding disorder;    -   Seizure disorder requiring active therapy;    -   Known drug or alcohol abuse;    -   Pregnant or nursing;    -   Any underlying medical condition that in the Principal        Investigator's opinion will make the study drug hazardous to the        subject or would obscure the interpretation of treatment        efficacy or safety; or    -   Inability or unwillingness to return for Follow-up visits and        comply with study protocol

Primary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Change in Mayo score at Day 57 compared with Screening

Secondary Outcome Measures:

-   -   Remission rate

Study Design:

This is a phase II, double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized,multi-dose study of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V)in subjects with active UC experiencing flare. All subjects will haveactive disease while on a 5-ASA containing medication and are either onstable doses of corticosteroids and/or azathioprine or 6-mercaptopurine,or who have previously been on these medications but could not toleratethem. Flare is defined as a Mayo score of 6 to 10 with moderate tosevere disease activity on endoscopy (Mayo endoscopic subscore of atleast 2) within 2 weeks of receiving study drug administration. Doses ofpermitted concomitant medications (corticosteroids, azathioprine (AZA),6-mercaptopurine (6-MP), and 5-aminosalicylates (5-ASA) containingcompounds) should remain constant during the course of the study.Subjects will be randomized to receive placebo or a compound of Formulas(I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) intravenously on Days 1, 15, 29, and 43.All subjects will be seen in the clinic at regular intervals up to Day85 for safety, efficacy, pharmacokinetic, and/or pharmacodynamicassessments. All subjects will be contacted 70 days after the last doseof study drug. Assessment of safety will be determined by vital signmeasurements, clinical laboratory tests, physical examinations,immunogenicity assessments, chest x-ray, electrocardiograms, and theincidence and severity of treatment emergent adverse events. The primaryclinical assessment of activity will be determined by the change in Mayoscore at Day 57 compared with Screening. Secondary endpoints includedetermination of remission rate by the mayo score at Day 57, evaluationof mucosal healing and change from baseline in the IBDQ score.

Example 38 Phase II Clinical Trial of the Safety and Efficacy ofCompounds of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) in Patients withMultiple Sclerosis

The purpose of this phase II trial is to investigate the safety,efficacy and tolerability of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) in patients with Relapsing-Remitting Multiple Schlerosis.

Patients:

Eligible subjects will be men and women between the ages of 18 and 65.

Criteria:

Inclusion Criteria:

-   -   Have a definite diagnosis of Relapsing remitting Multiple        Sclerosis    -   Have a history of at least 1 of the following: a. A minimum of 2        relapses of MS within the previous 2 years but not within the        1-month period prior to screening. b. A relapse of MS within the        previous 6 months but not within the 1-month period prior to        screening

Exclusion Criteria:

-   -   Have a CNS disease (e.g., CNS lymphoma, systemic lupus        erythematous)    -   Have significant bulbar involvement of MS or other neurologic        deficits    -   Have a decubitus ulcer    -   Have received immunomodulatory therapies within 3 months of        screening

Primary Outcome Measures:

-   -   The cumulative number of newly Gd-enhancing T1-weighted lesions        on cranial MRIs through week 23

Secondary Outcome Measures:

-   -   The total number of relapses of MS through week 23; change from        baseline in Expanded Disability Status Scale (EDSS) score at        week 23

Study Design:

This is a phase II, double-blind, placebo-controlled, randomized,dose-ranging study of multiple subcutaneous injections of a compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) in patients withrelapsing-remitting multiple sclerosis. Patients will receivesubcutaneous injections of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV)or (V) or placebo at weeks 0, 1, 2, 3, 7, 11, 15, and 19 or 100.

Example 39 Pharmaceutical Compositions Example 39A ParenteralComposition

To prepare a parenteral pharmaceutical composition suitable foradministration by injection, 100 mg of a compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) is dissolved in DMSO and then mixed with 10 mL of0.9% sterile saline. The mixture is incorporated into a dosage unit formsuitable for administration by injection.

In another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixed to form aninjectable formulation:

Ingredient Amount Compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) 1.2g sodium acetate buffer solution (0.4M) 2.0 mL HCl (1N) or NaOH (1M)q.s. to suitable pH water (distilled, sterile) q.s. to 20 mL

All of the above ingredients, except water, are combined and stirred andif necessary, with slight heating if necessary. A sufficient quantity ofwater is then added.

Example 39B Oral Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for oral delivery, 100 mg of acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is mixed with 750 mgof starch. The mixture is incorporated into an oral dosage unit, such asa hard gelatin capsule, which is suitable for oral administration.

In another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixed intimatelyand pressed into single scored tablets.

Ingredient Quantity per tablet, mg compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) 200 Cornstarch 50 croscarmellose sodium 25 Lactose120 magnesium stearate 5

In yet another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixedintimately and loaded into a hard-shell gelatin capsule.

Ingredient Quantity per tablet, mg compound of Formulas (I), (II),(III), (IV) or (V) 200 lactose, spray-dried 148 magnesium stearate 2

In yet another embodiment, the following ingredients are mixed to form asolution/suspension for oral administration:

Ingredient Amount Compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) 1 gAnhydrous Sodium Carbonate 0.1 g Ethanol (200 proof), USP 10 mL PurifiedWater, USP 90 mL Aspartame 0.003 g

Example 39C Sublingual (Hard Lozenge) Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for buccal delivery, such as ahard lozenge, mix 100 mg of a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III),(IV) or (V) with 420 mg of powdered sugar mixed with 1.6 mL of lightcorn syrup, 2.4 mL distilled water, and 0.42 mL mint extract. Themixture is gently blended and poured into a mold to form a lozengesuitable for buccal administration.

Example 39D Inhalation Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for inhalation delivery, 20 mgof a compound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is mixed with 50mg of anhydrous citric acid and 100 mL of 0.9% sodium chloride solution.The mixture is incorporated into an inhalation delivery unit, such as anebulizer, which is suitable for inhalation administration.

Example 39E Rectal Gel Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical composition for rectal delivery, 100 mg of acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is mixed with 2.5 gof methylcelluose (1500 mPa), 100 mg of methylparapen, 5 g of glycerinand 100 mL of purified water. The resulting gel mixture is thenincorporated into rectal delivery units, such as syringes, which aresuitable for rectal administration.

Example 39F Suppository Formulation

A suppository of total weight 2.5 g is prepared by mixing a compound ofFormulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) with Witepsol™ H-15(triglycerides of saturated vegetable fatty acid; Riches-Nelson, Inc.,New York), and has the following composition:

Ingredient Quantity per suppository, mg compound of Formulas (I), (II),500 (III), (IV) or (V) Witepsol ® H-15 balance

Example 39G Topical Gel Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical topical gel composition, 100 mg of acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is mixed with 1.75 gof hydroxypropyl cellulose, 10 mL of propylene glycol, 10 mL ofisopropyl myristate and 100 mL of purified alcohol USP. The resultinggel mixture is then incorporated into containers, such as tubes, whichare suitable for topical administration.

Example 39H Ophthalmic Solution Composition

To prepare a pharmaceutical ophthalmic solution composition, 100 mg of acompound of Formulas (I), (II), (III), (IV) or (V) is mixed with 0.9 gof NaCl in 100 mL of purified water and filtered using a 0.2 micronfilter. The resulting isotonic solution is then incorporated intoophthalmic delivery units, such as eye drop containers, which aresuitable for ophthalmic administration.

The examples and embodiments described herein are for illustrativepurposes only and in some embodiments, various modifications or changesare to be included within the purview of disclosure and scope of theappended claims.

Example 40

A compound having the structure of Formula (I):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NR₆—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₆ is H, or C₁-C₆alkyl;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₆ is H.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is aryl substituted with at leastone R₃.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₂ is pyridyl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of any one of Formula (I) wherein each R₃ is independentlyselected from F and CH₃.

The compound of any one of Formula (I) wherein R₁ is methyl.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is —CH₂CF₃.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is —CF₂CF₃.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is —CF₃.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₅ is —CF₂H.

The compound of any one of Formula (I) wherein R₁ is ethyl and R₅ is—CF₃.

The compound of any one of Formula (I) wherein n is 0.

The compound of any one of Formula (I) wherein n is 1.

The compound of Formula (I) wherein R₄ is F.

A compound having the structure of Formula (II):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereof.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein L₁ is —NHC(═O)—.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is aryl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is phenyl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is heteroaryl substituted withat least one R₃.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₂ is pyridyl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of any one of Formula (II) wherein each R₃ is independentlyselected from F and CH₃.

The compound of any one of Formula (II) wherein R₁ is methyl.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ is —CH₂CF₃.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ is —CF₂CF₃.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ is —CF₃.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₅ is —CF₂H.

The compound of any one of Formula (II) wherein R₁ is ethyl and R₅ is—CF₃.

The compound of any one of Formula (II) wherein n is 0.

The compound of any one of Formula (II) wherein n is 1.

The compound of Formula (II) wherein R₄ is F.

A compound having the structure of Formula (III):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NR₆—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₆ is H, or C₁-C₆alkyl;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R₆ is H.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R₂ is aryl substituted with atleast one R₃.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R2 is phenyl substituted with atleast one R3.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R2 is heteroaryl substituted withat least one R3.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R2 is pyridyl substituted with atleast one R3.

The compound of any one of Formula (III) wherein each R3 isindependently selected from F and CH3.

The compound of any one of Formula (III) wherein R1 is methyl.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R5 is C1-C6alkyl.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R5 is —CH2CF3.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R5 is —CF2CF3.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R5 is —CF3.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R5 is —CF2H.

The compound of any one of Formula (III) wherein R1 is ethyl and R5 is—CF3.

The compound of any one of Formula (III) wherein n is 0.

The compound of any one of Formula (III) wherein n is 1.

The compound of Formula (III) wherein R4 is F.

A compound having the structure of Formula (IV):

wherein:

-   -   L₁ is —NHC(═O)—, —C(═O)NH—;    -   R₁ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl, wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl, or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₄ is halogen;    -   R₅ is C₁-C₆alkyl, —CH₂CF₃, —CF₂CF₃, —CF₃, or —CF₂H;    -   n is an integer selected from 0-3; or    -   a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable        solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereof.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein L1 is —NHC(═O)—.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R2 is aryl substituted with atleast one R3.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R2 is phenyl substituted with atleast one R3.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R2 is heteroaryl substituted withat least one R3.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R2 is pyridyl substituted with atleast one R3.

The compound of any one of Formula (IV) wherein each R3 is independentlyselected from F and CH3.

The compound of any one of Formula (IV) wherein R1 is methyl.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R5 is C1-C6alkyl.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R5 is —CH2CF3.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R5 is —CF2CF3.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R5 is —CF3.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R5 is —CF2H.

The compound of any one of cla Formula (IV) wherein R1 is ethyl and R5is —CF3.

The compound of any one of Formula (IV) wherein n is 0.

The compound of any one of Formula (IV) wherein n is 1.

The compound of Formula (IV) wherein R4 is F.

A compound having the structure of Formula (V):

wherein:

-   -   R₁ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        optionally substituted with at least one R₃;    -   R₂ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl is        substituted with at least one R₄;    -   each R₃ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   each R₄ is independently selected from halogen, C₁-C₆alkyl or        C₁-C₆haloalkyl;    -   R₅ is H, CH₃, Et, isopropyl or allyl;    -   or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically        acceptable solvate, or pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug        thereof

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R2 is aryl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R2 is phenyl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R2 is heteroaryl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R2 is pyridyl.

The compound of any one of Formula (V) wherein each R4 is independentlyselected from F and CH3.

The compound of any one of Formula (V) wherein each R4 is F.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is aryl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is phenyl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is heteroaryl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is thiazolyl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is unsubstituted thiazolyl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is pyridyl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R1 is unsubstituted pyridyl.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R5 is CH3.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R5 is Et.

The compound of Formula (V) wherein R5 is allyl.

A compound of Formula V selected from2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2-fluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-6-methylbenzamide;N-(5-(1-ethyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-2,4,6-trifluorobenzamide;2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,4-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1-ethyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1-vinyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(4-methyl-5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2-fluoro-6-methyl-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-methyl-2-(oxazol-2-yl)-4,5′-bithiazol-2′-yl)benzamide.

A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptablediluents, excipient, or binder, and a compound of any one of Formulas(I-V) or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptablepro-drug, or pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof.

A method for treating a disease, disorder or condition in a mammal thatwould benefit from inhibition of store operated calcium channel activitycomprising administering to the mammal a compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate or pharmaceuticallyacceptable pro-drug thereof according to any one of Formulas (I-V).

A medicament of Formulas (I-V) for the treatment of a disease, disorderor condition in a mammal that would benefit from inhibition of storeoperated calcium channel activity comprising administering to the mammala compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereof.

Use of a compound of Formulas (I-V) in the manufacture of a medicamentfor the treatment of a disease, disorder or condition in a mammal thatwould benefit from inhibition of store operated calcium channel activitycomprising administering to the mammal a compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate or pharmaceuticallyacceptable pro-drug thereof.

A method of modulating store-operated calcium (SOC) channel activitycomprising contacting the SOC channel complex, or portion thereof, witha compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereofaccording to any one of Formulas (I-V).

A medicament of Formulas (1-V) for modulating store-operated calcium(SOC) channel activity comprising contacting the SOC channel complex, orportion thereof, with a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate or pharmaceutically acceptablepro-drug thereof according to any one of Formulas (I-V).

Use of compound of Formulas (1-V) in the manufacture of a medicament formodulating store-operated calcium (SOC) channel activity comprisingcontacting the SOC channel complex, or portion thereof, with a compoundor pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvateor pharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereof according to any one ofFormulas (I-V).

Use of a pharmaceutical composition of Formulas (I-V) in the manufactureof a medicament for the treatment of a disease, disorder or condition ina mammal that would benefit from inhibition of store operated calciumchannel activity comprising administering to the mammal a compound orpharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate orpharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereof

Use of pharmaceutical composition of Formulas (1-V) in the manufactureof a medicament for modulating store-operated calcium (SOC) channelactivity comprising contacting the SOC channel complex, or portionthereof, with a compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt,pharmaceutically acceptable solvate or pharmaceutically acceptablepro-drug thereof according to any one of Formulas (I-V).

The method of Formulas (I-V), wherein the disease, disorder or conditionin a mammal is selected from diseases/disorders involving inflammation,glomerulonephrititis, uvetis, hepatic diseases or disorders, renaldiseases or disorders, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, rheumatoidarthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, vasculitis, dermatitis,osteoarthritis, inflammatory muscle disease allergic rhinitis,vaginitis, interstitial cystitis, schleroderma, osteoporosis, eczema,organ transplant reject, allogeneic or xenogeneic transplantation, graftrejection, graft-versus host disease, lupus erythematosus, type 1diabetes, pulmonary fibrosis, dermatomyositis, thyroiditis, myastheniagravis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, hepatitis and atopic dermatitis,asthma, psoriasis, multiple schlerosis, Sjorgren's syndrome, andautoimmune diseases or disorders.

The medicament of Formulas (I-V), wherein the disease, disorder orcondition in a mammal is selected from diseases/disorders involvinginflammation, glomerulonephrititis, uvetis, hepatic diseases ordisorders, renal diseases or disorders, chronic obstructive pulmonarydisease, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory bowel disease, vasculitis,dermatitis, osteoarthritis, inflammatory muscle disease allergicrhinitis, vaginitis, interstitial cystitis, schleroderma, osteoporosis,eczema, organ transplant reject, allogeneic or xenogeneictransplantation, graft rejection, graft-versus host disease, lupuserythematosus, type 1 diabetes, pulmonary fibrosis, dermatomyositis,thyroiditis, myasthenia gravis, autoimmune hemolytic anemia, hepatitisand atopic dermatitis, asthma, psoriasis, multiple schlerosis,Sjorgren's syndrome, and autoimmune diseases or disorders.

What is claimed is:
 1. A compound having the structure of Formula (V):

wherein: R₁ is aryl or heteroaryl wherein aryl or heteroaryl isoptionally substituted with at least one R₃; wherein aryl is selectedfrom phenyl and napthyl, wherein heteroaryl is selected from furan,thiophene, pyrrole, oxazole, thiazole, isothiazole, imidazole,isoxazole, pyrazole, oxadiazole, thiadiazole, benzothiazole,benzoxazole, benzofuran, and indole; R₂ is phenyl or pyridyl whereineach is optionally substituted with at least one R₄; each R₃ isindependently selected from F, Cl, Br, I, CH₃, Et, CH₂F, CHF₂ or CF₃;each R₄ is independently selected from F, Cl, Br, I, CH₃, CH₂F, CHF₂ orCF₃; R₅ is H, CH₃, Et, isopropyl or allyl; or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate, orpharmaceutically acceptable prodrug thereof.
 2. The compound of claim 1wherein R₂ is phenyl.
 3. The compound of claim 1 wherein R₂ is pyridyl.4. The compound of any one of claims 1-3 wherein each R₄ isindependently selected from F and CH₃.
 5. The compound of any one ofclaims 1-3 wherein each R₄ is F.
 6. The compound of any one of claims1-5 wherein R₁ is aryl.
 7. The compound of claim 6 wherein R₁ is phenyl.8. The compound of any one of claims 1-5 wherein R₁ is heteroaryl. 9.The compound of claim 8 wherein R₁ is thiazolyl.
 10. The compound ofclaim 9 wherein R₁ is unsubstituted thiazolyl.
 11. The compound of claim8 wherein R₁ is pyridyl.
 12. The compound of claim 11 wherein R₁ isunsubstituted pyridyl.
 13. The compound of any one of claims 1-12wherein R₅ is CH₃.
 14. The compound of any one of claims 1-12 wherein R₅is Et.
 15. The compound of any one of claims 1-12 wherein R₅ is allyl.16. A compound of Formula V selected from2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(pyridin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2-fluoro-N-(5-(3-(2-fluorophenyl)-1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-6-methylbenzamide;N-(5-(1-ethyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-2,4,6-trifluorobenzamide;2,4,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,4-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;N-(5-(1-ethyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)-2,6-difluorobenzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1-vinyl-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiophen-2-yl)benzamide;2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(4-methyl-5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2-fluoro-6-methyl-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(5-methyl-1,2,4-oxadiazol-3-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,3,6-trifluoro-N-(5-(1-methyl-3-(thiazol-2-yl)-1H-pyrazol-5-yl)thiazol-2-yl)benzamide;2,6-difluoro-N-(5-methyl-2-(oxazol-2-yl)-4,5′-bithiazol-2′-yl)benzamide.17. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceuticallyacceptable diluents, excipient, or binder, and a compound of any one ofclaims 1-16 or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable pro-drug, or pharmaceutically acceptable solvate thereof. 18.A method for treating a disease, disorder or condition in a mammal thatwould benefit from inhibition of store operated calcium channel activitycomprising administering to the mammal a compound or pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt, pharmaceutically acceptable solvate or pharmaceuticallyacceptable pro-drug thereof according to any one of claims 1-16.
 19. Amethod of modulating store-operated calcium (SOC) channel activitycomprising contacting the SOC channel complex, or portion thereof, witha compound or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, pharmaceuticallyacceptable solvate or pharmaceutically acceptable pro-drug thereofaccording to any one of claims 1-16.
 20. The method of claim 19, whereinthe disease, disorder or condition in a mammal is selected fromdiseases/disorders involving inflammation, glomerulonephrititis, uvetis,hepatic diseases or disorders, renal diseases or disorders, chronicobstructive pulmonary disease, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory boweldisease, vasculitis, dermatitis, osteoarthritis, inflammatory muscledisease allergic rhinitis, vaginitis, interstitial cystitis,schleroderma, osteoporosis, eczema, organ transplant reject, allogeneicor xenogeneic transplantation, graft rejection, graft-versus hostdisease, lupus erythematosus, type 1 diabetes, pulmonary fibrosis,dermatomyositis, thyroiditis, myasthenia gravis, autoimmune hemolyticanemia, hepatitis and atopic dermatitis, asthma, psoriasis, multipleschlerosis, Sjorgren's syndrome, and autoimmune diseases or disorders.